You are on page 1of 495

Operator Handbook

Alcatel 1662SMC
STM4/16 Compact Multiservice Node

1662SMC Rel.2.7

3AL 98325ADAA Ed.02

3AL 98325ADAA Ed.02

Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.7 Operator Handbook
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.7

Handbook Guide

02 09/01/2009 Creation Chen Yu

01 03/01/2009 Creation Chen Yu

ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPROVED BY PREPARED BY

Distribution: Internal External

ED 02 SC 1: HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 98325 ADAA 1/15

1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK ································································3
1.1 General information ························································································································3
1.2 Handbook applicability···················································································································3
1.3 Purpose of the handbook···············································································································3
1.4 Handbook configuration check ·····································································································4
1.4.1 Notes on Ed.01 ·····························································································································4

2 PRODUCT-RELEASE HANDBOOKS ······································································································5
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS ··············································································································8
3.1 First aid for electric shock ·············································································································8
3.2 Norms and labels ····························································································································8

4 HANDBOOK DESCRIPTION ····················································································································9

5 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION ································································12
5.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation····································12
5.2 Handbook supply to Customers··································································································12
5.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation··············································································12
5.4 Handbook Updating ······················································································································12
5.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N) ·································13
5.4.2 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers·············································································13
5.4.3 Changes due to a new product-release······················································································13
5.5 Customer documentation supply on CD-ROM···········································································14
5.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CD-ROM·······································································14
5.5.2 Use of the CD-ROM····················································································································14
5.5.3 CD-ROM identification ················································································································15
5.5.4 CD-ROM updating ······················································································································15

ED 02 SC 1: HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 98325 ADAA 2/15

1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK

1.1 General information

WARNING
ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the implied
warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable for errors
contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or special, in connection
with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
NOTICE
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information purposes
only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the part of ALCATEL.
not permitted without written authorization.

COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION
The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or
disclosed to a third party without written consent.

1.2 Handbook applicability

This handbook applies to the following product-releases:

PRODUCT ANV P/N FACTORY P/N
1662SMC 3AL 98001 AAAA --
PRODUCT RELEASE VERSION(N.B.) ANV P/N FACTORY P/N
1662SMC 2.7 3AL 98002 ALAA --
For further information on the Alcatel software product and its physical distribution support refer to the
“Introduction” section.
N.B. NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS
Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operator’s Handbooks) are not modified
unless the new software “version” distributed to Customers implies man-machine interface changes or
in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the explained procedures.
Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-release’s “version”
marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if the screen
contents are unchanged.

1.3 Purpose of the handbook

This handbook describes the operations concerning commissioning, operation and maintenance that the
operators must carry out as indicated by the specific software application(s) referred to in this handbook
This handbook must be used together with the associated Technical Handbook (see Table 1.) and the
1320CT associated documentation (see Table 5.) does not replicate information contained into it.
In particular, all cautions relevant to safety, rules for EMC and ESD, as well as warnings regarding
operations that may cause damages to the equipment, are not duplicated here, but must be retrieved from
the Technical Handbook.

ED 02 SC 1: HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 98325 ADAA 3/15

When using this handbook it is assumed that the Operators know:
• The structure (hardware composition) and all the possible operating modes of the equipment
(product-release) this handbook refers to.
• How to use a PC and the Windows ambient applications

1.4 Handbook configuration check

This handbook is a collection of documents (each contained in a specific section) that can have
editions different from one another.
The Edition of the whole handbook is that of section 1 (HANDBOOK GUIDE).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The edition of the enclosed documents indicated in the following table is that of the corresponding original
internal document.
not permitted without written authorization.

HANDBOOK EDITION 01 02 03 04 05
REGISTER AND SECTION TITLE SECTION EDITION
1 HANDBOOK GUIDE n
2 INTRODUCTION MANUAL n
3 NE MANAGEMENT MANUAL n
4 MAINTENANCE MANUAL n
5 SIBDL MANUAL n

1.4.1 Notes on Ed.01
Ed.01 issued on Mar 2009 is the first released and validated version of the handbook.
.

ED 02 SC 1: HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 98325 ADAA 4/15

2 PRODUCT-RELEASE HANDBOOKS

The list of handbooks given here below is valid on the issue date of this Handbook and can be
changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook.

Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available on the issue date of this
Handbook.
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose product-release-
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

version is stated in para.1.2 consists of the following handbooks:
not permitted without written authorization.

Table 1. Handbooks related to the specific product hardware

REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No. FACTORY THIS HDBK
Part No.
1662SMC Rel.2.7 Technical 3AL 98325 AAAA
Handbook
[1]
Provide information regarding Equipment description, Maintenance, Hardware
setting documentation
1662SMC Rel.2.7 Installation 3AL 98325 ABAA
Handbook
[2]
Provide information regarding Equipment Installation

1662SMC Rel.2.7 Turnup & 3AL 98325 ACAA
Commissionig Handbook

[3] Provide information regarding Equipment Turn-On, Test and Operation

Table 2. Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control

REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No. FACTORY THIS HDBK
Part No. Or note
1662SMC Rel.2.7 3AL 98325 ADAA --
CT Operator’s Handbook
[4] Provides 1662SMC “SDH” Craft Terminal screens and operational procedures

ED 02 SC 1: HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 98325 ADAA 5/15

Table 3. Handbooks related to ATM specific product SW

REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No. FACTORY THIS HDBK
Part No. Or note
[5] ATM Rel.1.0 Operator’s Handbook 3AL 80730 AAAA 957.140.552 J

[6] ATM Rel.1.2 Operator’s Handbook 3AL 80814 AAAA 957.140.652 W
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Provides ATM SMART Terminal screens and operational procedures
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Table 4. Handbooks related to IP specific product SW

REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No. FACTORY THIS HDBK
Part No. Or note
[7] IP Rel.1.0 3AL 81062 AAAA 957.140.722 L
Operator’s Handbook
Provides ATM SMART Terminal screens and operational procedures

Table 5. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform

REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No. FACTORY THIS HDBK
Part No.
1320CT 3AL 79186 AAAA 957.130.542 E
[8] Basic Operator’s Handbook
Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT
(Craft terminal) of Alcatel InfoModel Network Elements.
1330AS Rel.5.1 Operator’s 3AL 71079 AAAA 957.130.442 A
Handbook

Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm
Surveillance software embedded in the 1320CT software package. Information
[9]
about Historical Alarms and Network Element Symbols Management (Physical
Network Management) are not valid for Craft Terminal. They are only used by
Network Management.
ELM Rel.5.0 Operator’s Handbook 3AL 71081 AAAA 957.130.462 E

[10] Provide detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event
Log Management software embedded in the 1320CT software package.

ED 02 SC 1: HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 98325 ADAA 6/15

Table 6. Documentation on CD-ROM

REF CD-ROM TITLE ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No.

1662SMC Rel.2.7 CD-ROM-DOC 3AL 98326AAAA
EN
[11]
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF. [1] to [4] Envisaged after the
release of all handbooks
1320CT BASIC CD-ROM-DOC EN 3AL 79549 AAAA 417.100.031
[12] Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF. [8] to [10]
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

ATM Rel.1.1 CD-ROM DOC EN 3AL80739 AAAA 417.100.060
[13]
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF. [5] Envisaged after the release of
all handbooks
[14] ATM 1.2 CD-ROM-DOC EN 3AL 80815 AAAA 417.100.068
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbook: REF. [6]

[15] IP 1.0 CD-ROM-DOC EN 3AL 81063 AAAA 417.100.084
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbook: REF. [7]

Table 7. Optional handbooks common to 16xxSM

REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No. FACTORY THIS HDBK
Part No.
S9-16xxSM 3AL 78901 AAAA 955.100.692 N
[16] System Installation Handbook
Provides general installation rules necessary to install the Optinex family
equipment in the S9 Rack.
Optinex RACK-16xxSM System 3AL 38207 AAAA 955.110.202 L
Installation Handbook
[17]
Provides general installation rules necessary to install the Optinex family
equipment in the Optinex Rack.

N.B. Handbooks REF. [16] and [17] are available only on paper support

ED 02 SC 1: HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 98325 ADAA 7/15

TREATMENT OF BURNS All rights reserved. WARNING: • Do not attempt to remove his clothing from the burnt parts.1 First aid for electric shock Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened. protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the conductor. • Apply dry gauze on the burns. loaded with software applicative described in this Handbook. Work-Station etc. EQUIPMENT LABELS Identical or similar information on Personal Computer. COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS. 3. SAFETY RULES • General rules • Harmful optical signals • Risk of explosion • Moving mechanical parts • Heat-radiating Mechanical Parts . the artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present). • Do not apply ointments or other oily substances. is supplied in the Constructor’s technical documentation. ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGERS (ESD) . other than ALCATEL’s. . Passing on and copying of this document. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY . ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION It is important to start mouth-to-mouth resuscitation at once and seek doctor help immediately.. 3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS 3. If that is not possible. It can also be employed while not permitted without written authorization.2 Norms and labels Refer to the Technical Handbook associated to ALCATEL’s designed and manufactured equipment to obtain the following information: . use and communication of its contents This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. ED 02 SC 1: HANDBOOK GUIDE 3AL 98325 ADAA 8/15 .

use and communication of its contents in order to carry out the tasks allowed by the specific product-release this handbook refers to. . Chapter 6: External input and output points management. The Handbook Guide includes the following chapters: . . Definitions concerning the acronyms. . This chapter describes how to display and set the input/output environmental alarm (housekeeping alarm). Alarm Configuration etc). Passing on and copying of this document. Chapter 3: Acronyms and abbreviations. The Craft Terminal main functionality in the NE management (EML-USM) are listed and briefly described. . Chapter 7: Diagnosis management. Chapter 5: Security Management. The Introduction Manual includes the following chapters: . Chapter 3: NE management supervision. abnormal condition list (as result of operator’s command). In this chapter are specified: access to the Alarm Surveillance to show the alarm condition. . NE Time. Chapter 1:Handbook structure and configuration check. concerning the OSI and IP communication protocols for the ED 02 SC 1: HANDBOOK GUIDE 3AL 98325 ADAA 9/15 . Chapter 4: Glossary of terms. Chapter 1: Introduction. . This chapter is dedicated to the NE states and NE access. SECTION 3: NETWORK ELEMENT MANAGEMENT Manual The aim of this document is to describe the Craft Terminal view. inserting operative information. This chapter gives information on the whole handbook application. Chapter 4: NE management general configuration. Chapter 2: General introduction on views and menus. 4 HANDBOOK DESCRIPTION This handbook is composed of the following Manuals: SECTION 1: HANDBOOK GUIDE (This document) The Handbook Guide gives general information on the application and use of the Handbook. Chapter 5: General on Alcatel Customer Documentation SECTION 2: INTRODUCTION Manual The Introduction Manual describes the main features of the graphical interface and provides a general overview of the system architecture and the different functionalities provided by the Craft Terminal. composition and evolution. In this chapter are presented the communication and routing parameters. The Craft Terminal is introduced and the software product listed. . The view organization is presented and the menus available listed and briefly described. This chapter gives the structure of this manual. Chapter 4: Handbook description . This chapter gives the structure of this manual. Chapter 2: General description of the Craft Terminal. not permitted without written authorization. Chapter 3: Safety norms and labels . The acronyms used in all the operator manuals are listed. . In this chapter configuration referred to the Security management are described (ACD level and Manager list). access to the Event and Alarm Log file and Internal Link Monitor. Chapter 1: Introduction. . This chapter lists the handbooks the Operator should have All rights reserved. . . . Chapter 2: Product-release handbooks. The Network Element Manual includes the following chapters: . In this chapter general configuration referred to the equipment management are described (CT access. Chapter 8: Communication and Routing management.

setting the relevant configuration. Passing on and copying of this document. This chapter permits to show the physical port available in a specific board (alarm synthesis and port symbol). This chapter permits to set the MS–SPRing protection of the NE . . . . Chapter 12: Equipment protection management. Chapter 2: Maintenance introduction. This chapter describes the operations necessary for the ATM boards creation and the ATM/IP/ETH TTPs creation. This chapter gives the structure of this manual. SECTION 4: NETWORK ELEMENT MAINTENANCE Manual This document aims at introducing the Maintenance procedure. . The Maintenance Manual includes the following chapters: . This chapter permits to manage the MSP protection. This chapter permits to manage the Overhead. . This chapter permits to set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. The SIBDL Manual includes the following chapters: ED 02 SC 1: HANDBOOK GUIDE 3AL 98325 ADAA 10/15 . This chapter permits to show and set the Termination Point of the equipment. . SECTION 5: SIBDL Manual This document describes the download procedure with SIBDL. . The Personal Computer manual is referred. the OS and each other related NE in order to provide a global communication capabilities inside the network . Chapter 11: Port view. local NE. thus having an overview of the complete signal flow of the various port. The replacement procedure is detailed. Detection location and correction of failure are presented. Chapter 19: MS–SPRing Management. . List the maintenance steps. . to access the port and to change the physical interface. . The Hardware upgrading procedure is detailed. not permitted without written authorization. This chapter permits to manage the EPS protection. Chapter 9: Equipment management. All rights reserved. . . Chapter 14: Transmission view. Shut Cdown and restart of the PC is indicated. Chapter 10: Board view. This chapter permits to set and show the transmission resources referred to the Port. Chapter 13: Multiplex Section protection management. This chapter permits to set and show Synchronization parameters and status. Chapter 6: Unit replacement with spare. This chapter permits to update the NE by means download procedure and to manage NE software. Chapter 7: Upgrading with New Hardware. . setting the relevant configuration. . Chapter 21: Software management. . Chapter 4: Problems with Craft terminal. This chapter deals mainly with the setting and changing of the boards present on the Equipment and undertaking board protection operations. Chapter 5: Troubleshooting (Corrective Maintenance). Chapter 18: Synchronization management. inserting information useful to identify alarms and troubleshoot the NE. . Chapter 1: Introduction. Chapter 17: Performance Monitoring management. use and communication of its contents . This chapter permits to manage the connection of the paths. Chapter 15: Cross connection management. Chapter 16: Overhead management. Chapter 3: Maintenance of the Personal Computer. Chapter 20: ISA/IP/ETH Configuration.

. Chapter 3: Configuration for SIBDL All rights reserved. Chapter 2: Download with SIBDL configuration . ED 02 SC 1: HANDBOOK GUIDE 3AL 98325 ADAA 11/15 . Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Chapter 1: Introduction .

Consequently. In particular the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the explanation of the man-machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it. Each handbook is identified by: . if envisaged by the contract.4 Handbook Updating The handbooks associated to the “product-release” are listed in para. The handbook edition (usually first edition=01). 5.1 Products. etc. that are born to improve or add some performance (mainly software) with respect to the previous version. not permitted without written authorization. use and communication of its contents “product-release” has been designed. as a whole. 5 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION 5. is subjected to commercial criteria as far as contents.2.5.) is envisaged. Standard hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibility and the information necessary for installing.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation Standard Customer Documentation. ED 02 SC 1: HANDBOOK GUIDE 3AL 98325 ADAA 12/15 . as described in para. The name of the “product-release” (and “version” when the handbook is applicable to the versions starting from it. or for bug fixing purposes. A “product-release” has its own standard Customer Documentation. Passing on and copying of this document. The handbook P/N. So. commissioning. 5.2 Handbook supply to Customers Handbooks are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer to. named “versions”. no supply to the Customers of design documentation (like software source programs. a “product-release” defines a set of hardware components and a software package which. identify the possible network applications and the equipment performance which the specific All rights reserved. composed by one or more handbooks. but not to the previous ones). formats and supply conditions are concerned (plant-dependent documentation is not described here). programming tools. operating and maintaining the equipment according to Alcatel-Telecom Laboratory design choices. must be always meant as plant-independent. referred to hereafter. The number of handbooks per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level. . . A “product” evolves through successive “product-releases” which are the real products marketed for their delivery at a certain “product-release” availability date. versions and Customer Documentation A “product” is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of performance and services for which it is meant. engineered and marketed for. A new “version” of a “product-release” may or may not produce a change in the status of the Customer Documentation set.4. In some cases a “product-release” has further development steps. 5. Plant-dependent documentation. . The handbook name. product-releases.

The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of print but to the date on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for the production. Only the date changes (pointed out in the Table of Contents) when modifications are made to the editorial system not changing the technical contents of the handbook. should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-release’s “version” marking. 5. By updated handbook delivery it is meant the supply of a complete copy of the handbook new issue (supplying errata-corrige sheets is not envisaged).g.1. 5. In affected chapters of each section. The handbook issue date. 5. The edition.02A). . the main changes with respect to the previous edition are listed.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N) The edition and date of issue might change on future handbook versions for the following reasons: .2 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers Supplying updated handbooks to Customers who have already received previous issues is submitted to commercial criteria.4. Slight changes (e. Passing on and copying of this document. is changed because modifications made concern technical contents.4 on page 5 indicates the section(s) edition change. from Ed. hence the date.02). from Ed. NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operator’s Handbooks) are not modified unless the new software “version” distributed to Customers implies man-machine interface hanges or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the explained procedures.g. • not permitted without written authorization. revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text and drawings (this is done after the first officially released and validated version). for corrections) maintain the same edition but with the addition of a version character (e.4. In this case: • The table in para. ED 02 SC 1: HANDBOOK GUIDE 3AL 98325 ADAA 13/15 .01 to Ed. if the screen contents are unchanged. • All rights reserved.4. In this case the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.g. .02 to Ed. they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version.3 Changes due to a new product-release A new product-release change the handbook P/N and the edition start from 01. use and communication of its contents In each section. Moreover. Changes concerning the technical contents of the handbook cause the edition number increase (e.

In some other cases. the same “CD-ROM” can contain the documentation of different Product-release (- version) s for a certain language.5 Customer documentation supply on CD-ROM In the following “CD-ROM” means Customer Documentation on “CD-ROM” 5. The files processed in this way are then transferred on a PC where the viewer (Interleaf-World-View) is added and a master CD-ROM is recorded. a “CD-ROM” contains the documentation of one product-release(-version) and for a certain language. so that the documentation present in the CD-ROMs is exactly the same the Customer would receive on paper. As a general rule: All rights reserved.1 Contents. Suitable checks are made in order to have a virus-free product.2.2 Use of the CD-ROM The CD-ROM can be used both in PC and Unix WS environments. use and communication of its contents CD-ROMs for Network Management products do not contain: not permitted without written authorization.5. Disk space: 20Mbyte The set-up procedure is present in the booklet included in the CD-ROM box. Copyright notification WorldView: Copyright 1981-1996 INTERLEAF Inc. ED 02 SC 1: HANDBOOK GUIDE 3AL 98325 ADAA 14/15 . After the set-up procedure. Passing on and copying of this document. the Customer is allowed to read the handbooks on the PC/WS screen. No additional information is added to each handbook. System Installation Handbooks related to racks that Customers could not buy from Alcatel together with the main equipment). creation and production of a CD-ROM In most cases. RAM: 32 Mbyte . 5.2) utilization on a PC is: . using the navigation and zooming tools included in the viewer. After a complete functional check. The Installation Guides The documentation of system optional features that Customers could not buy from Alcatel together with the main applicative SW.5. 5. CD-ROMs for Network Elements products do not contain the documentation of system optional features (e. which installs the viewer in the PC or Unix WS environment. N.2.g. The minimum configuration for World View (Rel. so that the CD-ROM can be produced and delivered to Customers. Processor: Pentium . Operative System: Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 . and to print selected parts of the documentation through a local printer. the CD-ROM image is electronically transferred to the archive of the Production Department.B. A CD-ROM is obtained collecting various handbooks and processing them by Interleaf-World-View-Press after the manual addition of some hyperlinks that make the navigation through the various handbooks easier.

5. END OF DOCUMENT ED 02 SC 1: HANDBOOK GUIDE 3AL 98325 ADAA 15/15 . by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by whose collection and processing the CD-ROM itself has been created. Updating of CD-ROMs always follows. The CD-ROM edition (usually first edition=01) 2) And. is also loaded in the Alcatel-Information-System as a structured list. The use of WorldView is permitted only in association with the files contained in the CD-ROMs officially supplied by Alcatel. 5. The name of the “product-release(s)” (and “version” when the CD-ROM is applicable to the versions starting from it.5. the updating of the single handbooks composing the collection. the Alcatel-Information-System automatically rises a warning toward the Customer Documentation department. The CD-ROM P/N (Factory P/N 417. Alcatel documents: All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. .3 CD-ROM identification not permitted without written authorization. Passing and copying of documents and files contained in the CD-ROMs officially supplied by Alcatel. but not to the previous ones). with a certain delay. Each CD-ROM is identified: 1) By the following external identifiers. internally. A writing indicating the language(s). All rights reserved. This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CD-ROM.5. indicating the list of CD-ROMs that must be updated to include the new editions of these handbooks/documents. . in association with the CD-ROM’s own P/N-edition.3 point 2).xxx.xxx x and ANV P/N). use and communication of its contents 5.4 CD-ROM updating The list of source handbook/document P/Ns-editions indicated in previous para. All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents are not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. that are printed both on the booklet and the CD-ROM upper surface: . Whenever a new edition of any of such handbooks/documents is released in the Alcatel archive system. .5.

Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.2:Introduction 3AL 98325 ADAA 1/15 . Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.7 Operator Handbook All rights reserved.7 Introduction 02 09/01/2009 Creation Chen Yu 01 03/01/2009 Creation Chen Yu ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPROVED BY PREPARED BY Distribution: Internal External √ ED 02 SC.

2...................................................3........................................................................................ Passing on and copying of this document..............3...........................................3.......7 2....................................1 Menu options ........................................................................................................................................... LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES .................... 2.........................................4 1.............10 Transmission management ..............8 2......7 Equipment and board management .................................2 Network Element general configuration..................................7 2....................................10 4 GLOSSARY OF TERMS ...............9 2.............................................................................9 2.......................4 External input and output point management......................................................................1 Network Element management supervision .............4 1...............................................................3.................................6 Communication and routing management.........2:Introduction 3AL 98325 ADAA 2/15 .........4 1....................................3 Craft Terminal main functionalities in the NE management·······················································6 2...............4 All rights reserved.................12 ED 02 SC....3.....8 2................2................................................................................5 Diagnosis management ...............3....................3 1 INTRODUCTION ...................................8 2...3...............................................................................1 Scope················································································································································4 1....................................1 Introduction ·····································································································································5 2...................................................................3............................................................................................................................................3..2 Reading rules ··································································································································4 1..............................................................................................................................3...............15 Software management .....................8 2..................... use and communication of its contents 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE CRAFT TERMINAL ...............5 2.........................13 Synchronization management...................................................9 Protection management.......................................7 2.2..............................5 not permitted without written authorization..........................3................................2 Alcatel software product and licence delivered to the customer ··············································5 2......................................................7 2......................................................8 Port management ...................................3.........................9 2.....9 2...........2 Software products and licences list and part numbers...1...........................2 Target audience.3................................................................................................................6 2...........1..................3 Security Management........1 Document scope.....................7 2...............12 Performance monitoring management ........................................3...........................9 3 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ...................................................................1 Software product and licences description ...........................................................................................................................3..11 Cross Connection management..........................................14 ISA port Configuration ..................6 2.......................

...............6 Table 2........ Software licence part numbers............................. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.........6 All rights reserved...................2:Introduction 3AL 98325 ADAA 3/15 .................................................... LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES TABLES Table 1........................... ED 02 SC.................. Passing on and copying of this document....................................... Software products part numbers ......

ED 02 SC. – 1320CT Basic Operator’s Handbook 1. All rights reserved.1 Document scope The Introduction Manual presents the Craft Terminal main functions and provides a general overview of the different functionalities provided by the ELM–USM of the Craft Terminal for Info Model NE.1. but not necessarily all the options of these menus.2 Target audience The Introduction Manual is intended for all users.2 Reading rules 1. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents The documents that should be read before starting this document are: not permitted without written authorization.1.2:Introduction 3AL 98325 ADAA 4/15 .1 Scope 1. 1. the information is surely given in another manual. 1 INTRODUCTION 1.2.1 Menu options All the manuals describe menus. When a menu option is not detailed in a manual.

Details information about Specific Application are described in the relevant Operator’s Handbook (see Section 1 HANDBOOK GUIDE for the code). In this CD–ROM are contained: Software packages for NE management by means of the craft terminal Software package of the NE. The management main functions of the EML–USM are inserted at para. A detailed description of the EML–USM screens is given in Section Ne Management of this handbook. 2. From the Craft Terminal is possible to run another Specific Software application. common to all the NE using the same Craft Terminal. The list and part numbers of the SDH software products distributed by Alcatel is inserted in para. Alcatel typically offers several software licenses on the software product (only one for this equipment) They are referred both to the Network Element software features and to the Craft Terminal software features.2 Alcatel software product and licence delivered to the customer 2. The software package used for updating the NE must be installed on the PC and then downloaded on the NE. Multiple NE management up to 32 Network elements is possible obtaining a remote Craft Terminal application. ED 02 SC. This application is in charge of the ATM and IP management inside the NE such as ATM/IP cross–connection. The Craft Terminal characteristic (computer configuration) are listed in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbook. which the operator has to read before this Handbook. rules. etc. to be installed in the NE or update the NE (by means of download function) The software package used for management permits the dialogue between craft terminal and NE. not permitted without written authorization.2.2. the same handbook contains the detailed description of common operations as “Installation” and common screens as “Network Element Synthesis view”. navigation. The general information of the Craft Terminal are presented in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbook. providing ITU– compliant Information Model Interface to the Network Element. Further.1 Software product and licences description The software products are distributed by Alcatel in a CD–ROM. 2. The Network Element Synthesis view is the first view presented to the operator entering the application. thus following product evolution. This Operator’s Handbook deals with the EML–USM views of the Craft Terminal. use and communication of its contents In the Basic Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbook are described all the general description of use. Starting from this view it is possible login the NE and than enter the EML–USM views.1 Introduction The Craft Terminal is a project in charge of the local management of single network elements. Passing on and copying of this document.2. All rights reserved.2:Introduction 3AL 98325 ADAA 5/15 .3. 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE CRAFT TERMINAL 2. which directly permit to manage the Network Element. to realize all the functions of the NES and EML–USM. Backup and Restore configuration files etc.

IGPM 8DG15540AEAA SNOOP. listed on the following table.2 Software products and licences list and part numbers Every Software Product is identified by a denomination and a part number. Software licence part numbers not permitted without written authorization.7 3AL98312ACAA SWL-OMSN METRO VERS. "A" TDM LP 8DG15540ACAA SWL-OMSN METRO VERS. DCP 1662SMC R 2. 2. FX I/F 8DG15540AGAA SWL ENH ETH (ES16): OAM. "A" ATM LP 8DG15540AAAA SWL-OMSN METRO VERS.7 CD–ROM 3AL 98326 AAAA Every Software licence is identified by a denomination and a part number. SRV 8DG15540AHAA DELIMITING. PORT MIRROR SWL ENH ETH (ES4): OAM. Name ANV Part Number N.2.B. referred to the Network Element management views. IGMP 8DG15540AFAA SNOOP. The functionalities constitute the heading of each of the paragraphs below.1 Network Element management supervision Deals with the NE state and access. 2. "A" ETH LP 8DG15540ABAA SWL-OMSN METRO VERS. EPS. Passing on and copying of this document. PORT MIRROR 2. ED 02 SC. Table 1. SWL-UPGRADE NODE 1662SMC TO REL 2. use and communication of its contents Table 2.3. All rights reserved. obtained by means EML–USM. listed on the following table. LAG. LAG.2:Introduction 3AL 98325 ADAA 6/15 . "A" WDM LP 8DG15540ADAA SWL ENH ETH (ES1): OAM.3 Craft Terminal main functionalities in the NE management In this chapter. are described the main functionalities of the Craft Terminal.B. POT MIRROR SWL ENH ETH (ES16): PING OAM. LAG. Software products part numbers Name ANV Part Number N.

Different types of protection can be managed: – Local NE and OS addresses – NTP configurations – LAPD.2:Introduction 3AL 98325 ADAA 7/15 . use and communication of its contents Alarm re-synchronization. All rights reserved.3. the OS and each other related NE. Alarms information are detailed in the Alarms Surveillance Manual – Abnormal Condition list (as result of operator’s commands) – Event log Manager Permits to have access to the Event Log file. Allow/Inhibit alarm notification. – Remote Inventory (”upload” and “view” remote inventory) –Internal Link Monitor 2. Passing on and copying of this document. – Alarm Surveillance The alarms concerning a particular managed entity will be represented in a synthetic way in all the views concerning the entity.3. – Set Manager list – Set ACD level 2.6 Communication and routing management This deals with the configuration parameters concerning the communication protocols for the local NE. 2.4 External input and output point management Deals with housekeeping signals input from the external (station alarms) or forwarded (output) towards the external. Ethernet. – Craft Terminal access state (allow or inhibit) – NE Time management – Alarms Configuration Alarm Severity Assignment Profile management. not permitted without written authorization.2 Network Element general configuration Deals with the general configuration of the equipment. – Display External points – Configure External points 2.5 Diagnosis management For real time alarm reporting and subsequent fault localization and correction.3.3. MESA. RAP configurations ED 02 SC. – Restart NE 2.3.3 Security Management Deals with the security configuration of the equipment.

10 Transmission management This permits to cover the management of the transmission resources. HOA ATM and IP). – Remote Inventory All rights reserved.3. The Board view permits to access the Port view. PPI. This permits to set and show the transmission resources (TP) referred only to the port (SDH. PDH.3. opening the views of all the specific ports of the NE (SDH and PDH). VC4). etc. – IP Configuration – Tunneling Configuration 2. permitting to define the types of boards present.7 Equipment and board management Deals with the presentation of the equipment and the hierarchical tree structure. For each port a specific menu is available where various configuration of the specific port can be set. – Details of alarm and state condition – TP role. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents 2. – Set / modify / remove boards – Software information of the selected board.3.9 Protection management This deals with the protection mechanism that is possible to configure in the NE. RST.3. for example: – Automatic Laser Shutdown – MSP protection – Loopback management and configuration – Single fiber configuration – TP Frame Mode Configuration – Retiming – Ethernet Port Configuration Port view is also the entry point of other “management functions”: – Performance Monitoring management – Cross Connection management For each port are presented: – The various ITU–T functional blocks (i.e.8 Port management not permitted without written authorization. ED 02 SC. connection. information 2. Different types of protection can be managed: – Equipment protection switching – Multiple Section Protection 2.2:Introduction 3AL 98325 ADAA 8/15 . It is used to check the detailed alarm of each TP and to configure them (many options are the same of the Transmission view).

It consists of a set of functions that evaluate and report on the behavior of the NEs and their effectiveness relating to the communications taking place on the Network. thus following product evolution. DVB-ASI and ISA BCE TPs creation. – Back–up and restore on the MIB of the NE.11 Cross Connection management All rights reserved. PPI.3. – Synthesis of alarm and state condition – TP role. log and display performance data associated with the managed NE according ITU–T G.3.3. Similar operation are made on the Overhead cross connections. 2.e. For all the ports are presented: – The various ITU–T functional blocks (i.3. – Create / modify cross connections – Activate / deactivate / switch cross connections 2.14 ISA port Configuration Describes the operations necessary for the ATM/PR_EA/ETH. or as a consequence of substitution with a spare. RST. T5 and T6 configuration – Protection commands 2. 2. SSU. connection. collect. It supplies an overview of the complete signal flow.13 Synchronization management Deals with the management of the timing. Passing on and copying of this document.12 Performance monitoring management This function deals with the set up.826. – Timing source. – Set up the Performance Monitoring thresholds – Collect and display Performance Monitoring data – Performance monitoring history 2. T0. permitting to charge the software in the relevant NE to upgrade the NE software. T4. which are the starting and terminating points not permitted without written authorization. etc. In this way the multiplex structures are created. DVB-ASI and ISA BCE boards and the ATM/PR_EA/ETH.15 Software management Deals with the manipulation of the software package within NE. VC4). of a transmission segment.3. managing the traffic flow. information For each port a specific menu is available similar to the Port view where various configuration of the specific port can be set.2:Introduction 3AL 98325 ADAA 9/15 . use and communication of its contents This deals with the connection of all the Termination Point (TP). Also Transmission view is than the entry point of other “management functions” . ED 02 SC. – Software download refers to the NE software.

3 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS AIS: Alarm Indication Signal APS: Automatic Protection Switching ASAP: Alarm Severity Assignment Profile ASI: Asynchronous Serial Interface ATM: Asynchronous Transfer Module BNC: Bayonet Not Coupling CD–ROM: Compact Disc Read Only Memory All rights reserved.2:Introduction 3AL 98325 ADAA 10/15 . CT: Craft Terminal DCN: Data Communications Network DVB: Digital Video Broadcast ECC: Embedded Communication Channels EML: Element Management Layer EPS: Equipment Protection Switching FAD: Functional Access Domain Gbit/s: Gigabits per second GNE: Gateway Network Element HMI: Human Machine Interface IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IM: Information Manager Kbit/s: Kilobits per second LAN: Local Area Network LVC: Lower Order Virtual Container MAC: Media Access Control Mbit/s: Megabits per seconds MIB: Management Information Base MS: Multiplex Section MSP: Multiplex Section Protection NAD: Network Access Domain NAP: Network Access Point NE: Network Element NML: Network Management Layer NTP: Network Time Protocol OS: Operation System ED 02 SC. use and communication of its contents CCITT: Telegraph and Telephone International Consultative Committee not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.

PI: Physical Interface SD: Signal Degrade SF: Signal Failure TMN: Telecommunications Management Network TN: Telecommunications Network TP: Termination Point USM: User Service Manager XC: Cross–Connection All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 02 SC.2:Introduction 3AL 98325 ADAA 11/15 . Passing on and copying of this document.

use and communication of its contents Alarm: not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved. Embedded Communication Channel: Communication channel used in conjunction with packet commuting networks (X25) to manage distant SDH networks. the operator has to acknowledge it to point out that he has seen it and that he will react in the right way. Element Management Layer: This application is responsible for the configuration and management of Network Elements. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities. Craft Terminal: Workstation or Personal computer (PC) from which local address to an NE is possible. An alarm is characterized by an alarm begin and an alarm end. Administrator: A user who has access rights to all the Management Domains of the Craft Terminal product. Equipment Protection Switching: Used to provide protection for cards within an equipment to protect traffic in the event of card failure. Board: A board is part of an NE.2:Introduction 3AL 98325 ADAA 12/15 . Alarm Severity Assignment Profile: Function allowing the assignment of severities to the alarms depending on their probable causes. During alarm configuration it is possible to set a maximum delay for alarm acknowledgement. An alerting indication to a condition that may have an immediate or potentially negative impact on the state of an equipment or the CT. 4 GLOSSARY OF TERMS Acknowledgment: When an alarm is taken into account by the application. These communication channels are related to the QECC* protocols. Alarm Status: Identifies the type and severity of an occurring alarm. this is the possibility of routing one signal to a particular destination. They are electronic cards that fit into slots in the NE. Digital Communication network: Communication Network in which the transmission of data is done in a digitized format. Is useful for stocking data due to its available memory space. It can be used to configure or perform monitoring tasks on the NE. Cross–connection Cross–Connections provide the network with the Routing Capabilities. They can be configured by an operator to reject specified types of notifications and limit the processing that is applied to ED 02 SC. Filter: They are related to the alarms or events generated on an NE or internally within the OS itself. Compact Disk Read Only Memory: Data saving support from which the information can only be read. Passing on and copying of this document. The operator can decide whether or not the alarm clear has to be acknowledged.

or on the network itself.QECC*. Megabits per second: Unit that corresponds to the transmission of 10 6 bits every second. Passing on and copying of this It is a Network Element devoted to the control. Kilobits per second: Unit that correspond to the transmission of 10 3 bits every second. them.2:Introduction 3AL 98325 ADAA 13/15 . Human Machine Interface: It is the graphical user interface application through which the operators interact with the system. Gigabits per second: Unit that corresponds to the transmission of 10 9 bits every second. from the OS. Management Domain: The Craft Terminal product is partitioned into management domains for functional proposes. Logs: Logs are files used to store history data concerning the incoming notifications. Gateway Network Element: All rights reserved. of those NEs providing a QECC* interface. Multiplex Section: ED 02 SC. operator commands and system alarms. The size of the log can be configured. Functional Access Domain: It defines the range of functions which are available to a specified user. Line Terminal: A line terminal is the end point of a communication link. To document. use and communication of its contents do this it uses a QB3* interface and performs the conversion QB3* . it is used to transmit or receive signals. not permitted without written authorization. Each management domain is associated with functionalities that enable the operators to manage the NEs. all its records are deleted. History Report: This function enables operators to get information concerning performances. Media Access Control Address: Represents the Level 2 address for Local Area Networks. security or alarms on entities composing the network. The operator specifies the time period for which he requires the report. International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee: Standard organization for telecommunications. Now called the ITU–T (International Telecommunication Union). When a log is flushed. They can undertake signal conversion functions (adapting a signal to two different transmission media) or multiplexing/demultiplexing functions. Multiplexer: Equipment used to combine several signals to produce a single signal at a higher transmission rate and to decompose it back to the smaller rate signals. Flushing: This deals with logs.

Telecommunication Management Network: Defines the concept of interoperable management of TNs. use and communication of its contents Notification: not permitted without written authorization. Severity: Linked to alarms.2:Introduction 3AL 98325 ADAA 14/15 . In general. Thresholding: This is the assignment of a specified value to monitored parameters (for example Bit Error Rates) that. represents the section containing the multiplexed signals. Operator: The end–user of the Craft Terminal. Network Management Level: Designates the management functions performed on networks elements assembled in a network. Telecommunication Network: Describes the network to be managed. Have characteristics compliant with CCITT recommendations. The 1353SH is an Operation System. He supervises a part of the network that is dependant on his user profile. They provide an organized network structure to achieve the interconnection of the different components of the TN and the services to process the information. Network Element: Either a telecommunication equipment or groups parts of a Telecommunication Network. signal loss monitoring and loopback functions. Physical Interface: Electrical or Electrical/Optical transformers that decouples the line signals and adapt the form of signal for further transmission. Terminal Point: Describes either the origin or the termination of a signal in equipment. Is related to a port. Passing on and copying of this document. severities indicate the magnitude related to the failure. it offers to the operator a set of functions necessary to supervise the NEs. using protocols and interfaces. Port: A physical point at which the Network Element can be attached to a transmission medium. generate trouble indications. ED 02 SC. Spontaneous data received by the system concerning an NE. Provides the transmission. Operation System: A system dedicated to the supervision of NEs in a standard way. Network Access Domain: Defined as a set of Network Elements. Repeater: Equipment used to regenerate a signal when it has travelled a long distance. NADs are used to define the set of Network Elements that a user can manage. This functional block also manages clock extraction. the transport and the switching supports to the interconnected Network Elements. All rights reserved. when exceeded. A port is either a termination point or an origination point.

2:Introduction 3AL 98325 ADAA 15/15 . Passing on and copying of this document. END OF DOCUMENT ED 02 SC. To give user access to Craft Terminal functionality. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved. Wrapping: Wrapping is the technique that enables the most recent entries in a file to replace the oldest when a file is full. User Service Manager: These are presentation processes used by the Craft Terminal to manage the Human Machine Interface and facilitate the interaction with the product. User Profile: Identifies the functionalities of the Craft Terminal to which a user has access. the administrator must assign a profile to a UNIX user account by choosing one among the predefined profiles installed with Craft Terminal. A finite number of predefined user profiles is determined by a fixed set of FADs.

use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.7 Operator Handbook All rights reserved.7 NE Management 02 09/01/2009 Creation Chen Yu 01 03/01/2009 Creation Chen Yu ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPROVED BY PREPARED BY Distribution: Internal External √ ED 02 SC. Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2. Passing on and copying of this document. Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 1/386 .

......................1 Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state...........................................................1 NE management states·················································································································40 3.........1..................................................1 Procedure to modify an ASAP ......3 Diagnosis menu introduction .......30 2......................................................................................33 2........................3.................12 Synchronization menu introduction .............................................2 Alarm Severity Assignment Profile Management (ASAP) ...........................................2............28 2....................................5 MS-SPRing menu introduction ..........2..................... 2.....11 Transmission menu introduction .........................................................................1 Scope··············································································································································21 1.......2.............................................................................26 2............................... Passing on and copying of this document..........................................................................................................2.......25 2.....................................................................................................27 2.......... 1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................2 Introduction on the EML--USM menu options············································································23 2.....................................................................................7 Equipment menu introduction ......................13 External Points menu introduction...................2.........6 Download menu introduction ............................3 Alarm Configuration ·····················································································································45 4..................................1 Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access)·········································································42 4.............................................1.........................................1 Acronyms and abbreviations ........................................................1....27 2...1 EML--USM view organization ·······································································································22 2.....30 2....................................2.........2 Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state .......................21 1....2 Terminology···································································································································21 1.................28 2...........2.....2 NE Time management···················································································································43 4.......................................................................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 2/386 ...2...........2.......................10 EPS menu introduction........8 Board menu introduction.......3...................................................43 4......40 3.................................45 ED 02 SC...................2 Configuration menu introduction.............21 1...................................2 NE supervision and login ·············································································································40 4 NE MANAGEMENT GENERAL CONFIGURATION ........................21 All rights reserved.............................1........................................................21 1..................27 2...................21 1.......................22 not permitted without written authorization.................................................................27 2....................................................................42 4..........................2 Target audience.......1 Document scope........1 Views menu introduction......42 4...........2..2...........25 2....................... use and communication of its contents 2 GENERAL INTRODUCTION ON VIEWS AND MENUS......................................................2...............................45 4.....4 Supervision menu introduction ..2 Glossary of terms.................................................3 Advices on Navigation principles ·······························································································37 3 NE MANAGEMENT SUPERVISION ..............9 Port menu introduction...........................................................................2.......................2.......................2........................................32 2..................................................................

...............50 4........................3 Local Configuration ······················································································································75 8.....................70 8........................5.4 Log Browsing ································································································································66 7.......66 7..............................9 Reachable Address Prefixes Configuration ···············································································89 8............................................ use and communication of its contents 6 EXTERNAL INPUT AND OUTPUT POINTS MANAGEMENT .3 Internal Link Monitor·····················································································································64 7.. 6........2 Communication and routing views ·····························································································73 8..............5......................1 Upload remote Inventory .....61 7......70 8.2 Abnormal Condition List ··············································································································63 7........................................................1 Displaying external points ···········································································································56 6...........................1 Overview on Communication and Routing Domain ··································································70 8..............1.................................3.1 Set Manager list·····························································································································54 5............................3.................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 3/386 ............................................................................51 4....................................6 LAPD Configuration······················································································································79 8......................................................5 Remote Inventory··························································································································66 7....11 IP Configuration ····························································································································91 ED 02 SC...2 View Remote Inventory...................................2 Partitioning into separate Routing Domains ......1 OSI Protocol on QB3/Qecc...7 DCC Cross Connection ················································································································82 8.8 Ethernet Configuration ·················································································································87 8.......................3 IP over OSI tunneling for ATM/IP .....1........................1 Expanding or reducing external points list............................1...........2 Set ACD level·································································································································54 All rights reserved.................... 4............................68 8 COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING MANAGEMENT...........................6 Alarms persistency Configuration ............ Passing on and copying of this document...............................................1......72 8.......................................................................56 not permitted without written authorization........3.......52 4............71 8.......5 Alarms re—synchronization..............4 OSI over IP tunneling on QB3 ...............................................................4 Restart NE······································································································································53 5 SECURITY MANAGEMENT ...................10 Manual ES Adjacencies table Configuration··············································································90 8.........58 6.........................1 Alarms surveillance ······················································································································61 7......................3 Set SdhNE Alarms Severities ....................................2 External points configuration ······································································································58 7 DIAGNOSIS MANAGEMENT ..............54 5..................72 8....................................3.........................49 4.............................1........................................4 Allow/Inhibit Alarms Notifications.................4 OS Configuration ··························································································································76 8......................................................................................................................................................5 NTP Server Configuration ············································································································77 8...................

....8 Show supporting equipment······································································································112 10 BOARD VIEW.........................................................................4 Set Retiming ································································································································121 11...................................4...117 11 PORT VIEW....................................113 10.2 Change Physical Interface .............1 Port Access ....6.............................................6..................2................. Passing on and copying of this document.....................................118 11.5 Software description···················································································································108 9...... 8.............................................................................5 AU4 Concatenation ·····················································································································123 11........115 10................ 9.......11............13 OSPF Area Table Configuration ··································································································92 8...6 Remote Inventory························································································································109 9..................................128 11.....1 Setting a board in service ....................108 9......1 Introduction ·································································································································113 10.......................................97 9......................16 OSI over IP ·····································································································································95 8.........4....6.....................................107 9..................................................................2.......1 Automatic Laser Shutdown Configuration.........................................7 Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) ························································································111 9.2.....1 Introduction and navigation·········································································································97 All rights reserved..4 Ms Configuration .......17 IP over OSI ·····································································································································95 9 Equipment Management ..........................................................................4 Board administrative state ·········································································································107 9.14 IP Address Configuration of Point-to-Point Interfaces ·····························································93 8..............................................3 Single Fibber Configuration.................................................................................107 9.2 Board View Menu ························································································································115 10........................2 Show Optical Configuration........................................91 8...2 Port View: elements on the TP ··································································································119 11...2 Setting a board out of service ......................................................................................2 Set and change or remove board/subrack ···············································································100 not permitted without written authorization..................................................3 Port View Menu ···························································································································121 11............12 IP Static Routing Configuration···································································································91 8.......3 Connect Fan to CONGI board ····································································································106 9..3 Consulting a Board's Administrative state .................................126 11.130 ED 02 SC......1 Introduction ·································································································································118 11......15 ISA board IP Address ···················································································································94 8..... use and communication of its contents 9.6..............................1 IP routing configuration for ATM/IP boards management .............................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 4/386 ...............................129 11........116 10.......................................................3 Show supporting equipment................................6 Physical Media option menu······································································································125 11........................................4.........................................................

....149 12.5.........................3.... Passing on and copying of this document..............136 11...................................1 TP Search.....7 Ethernet Mapping Protocol.........................6..............................5 MSP Delete···································································································································167 13...............................177 14...2 View elements ·····························································································································178 14...................181 ED 02 SC..............................................179 14.....................................10 Navigate to Monitoring View ······································································································146 All rights reserved..........3 Naming TPs..........................3.1 Architecture types·······················································································································161 13.....................................4 Transmission view access and menu·······················································································180 14..........3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 5/386 ....................134 11....................131 11............................180 14....................................................................................................................8 Show Supporting Board ·············································································································143 11......................................................................................3........................................................................3 MSP Create ··································································································································162 13...........6 Ethernet Port Configuration....................7 TP Frame Mode Configuration···································································································140 11.....................1 Overview ······································································································································177 14......................................................................... 12 Equipment Protection management (EPS) .......................2 Management: consulting and modifying EPS··········································································149 12......6...........................................................................131 11..............4 Dynamic View Behaviour ................... use and communication of its contents 11..........1 MSP modification.........................................4..........9 Navigate to Transmission View ·································································································144 11.2 MSP Options Introduction··········································································································161 13.4 Switching EPS ·····························································································································155 12....178 14.......................8 Control Path Activation.................3 Configuration: revertive and WTR for EPS···············································································154 12........166 13.........6...................................9 LCAS Configuration.............................5 Line Length Configuration .......3...........................134 11......................6....................7 MSP Commands··························································································································170 13.............................1 View Description.......... 11....3 View Layout ·································································································································178 14.........2 Number of TPs Displayed in Transmission View ..............161 13....................................4 MSP Management ·······················································································································165 13...11 Port Mode Overview····················································································································147 not permitted without written authorization...........8 MSP overview ······························································································································172 14 TRANSMISSION VIEW ....179 14.....................6....................................................................5 EPS Overview ······························································································································156 13 Multiplex Section Protection Management ..........6 Display of Protection State ········································································································168 13..............................................1 Introduction ·································································································································149 12..5 Add TP··········································································································································181 14.

...............................................................1 Loopback Configuration ..............................1..........211 15.....................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 6/386 .....1 Set Domain..2 Hide ..207 14......6 TP Configuration ·························································································································188 14...6....................................................10..............12..............................................................................1 Terminate TP.............................................................................................6.....9 Terminate/Disterminate TP·········································································································195 14..........................190 14.............................7 TP Frame Mode Configuration···································································································193 14......................................................................................................................4 Navigate to Port View....3...............................................................9.2 J0 Section Trace management ....................228 15.............................................................218 15....1...1 Introduction ·································································································································211 15...11 Structure TPs·······························································································································200 14.............................214 15.....1.................230 ED 02 SC.............................................207 14............................................................3.......2 Multiplex Structures for SDH ..................1 Expand .......................1.......................................6 Cross-Connection Protection ......................................3 Show Supported Board ..................13 Physical Media ····························································································································205 14................14..............................211 15...............................206 14.......................................................219 15.........................196 14..........6.......................1 Overview........................................................14......12................................1 Creation/Deletion.............................................................................................210 15 Cross-Connection Management......... 14.................................2 Configuration .............................10.........................3 Low Order TP Configuration.............................14 Navigation Commands ···············································································································207 14............................198 14..........................................9.........195 All rights reserved.............................208 14................................................................................5 Cross-Connection Types.................3 Definition of Termination Points (TP) ......................221 15..........................................................................................14...................13.......................................................................................1 High Order TP Configuration.........4 Mapping Tables: TP Names...............................195 14...............................................................2 Operative Sequence to execute Cross-Connections ······························································223 15..................... use and communication of its contents 14................1..........................14........2 Cross-Connection List ....................................200 14.............5 Navigate to HOA Port....................190 14................................................................... 14.1 Search Criteria.................14.........................1...............188 14......2 Disterminate TP.................................2 Loopback Management..12 Loopback ·····································································································································200 14.......................................................................................................................3 Cross-Connections management······························································································227 15.............10 Monitoring Operations················································································································196 not permitted without written authorization...............................................................................208 14...211 15................................................................203 14.......................... Passing on and copying of this document...8 TP Threshold Configuration·······································································································194 14..

..........................232 15...............................................1......243 15..... use and communication of its contents 15..........................................................................................7 OH Phone Parameters ················································································································259 17 Performance Monitoring ..........3 Delete a Cross-Connection ....................... 15.....................................................1........................ Passing on and copying of this document....................................................3 Actions available................................................2 Deactivate a Cross-Connection.......................1......................................244 15...........................................................3.....................1 Overview......263 17...............261 17...........................4 OH Cross Connection·················································································································252 16.............243 All rights reserved.............................1..............1 Split a Cross-Connection................5 End to End (e-e 24h) Performance Counting...............................................................7 Tandem Connection Termination (TCT) and Monitoring (TCM) ......................................2 Join Two Cross-Connections ......................1 Cross-Connection Parameters ........8 Print ··············································································································································247 15..................................1.........4.....5...............................................................................................................6...................................................................6......1..................................................................................................8 Performance Monitoring on 2 Mbit/s ISDN–PRA ........................263 17......................................260 17.................7 Protection Switching ··················································································································246 15...........6 OH TP deleting ····························································································································258 16...3 Far End (FE) and Near End (NE) Performance Counting........264 17..1.....4.....2 Create a Cross-Connection.............5 Activate/Deactivate/Delete Cross-Connections ·······································································243 15............................ 15..........2 OH Connection overview············································································································250 16..............2 Supported Performance Counters..........................9 Performance Data Collection ......10 Data Collection ......................260 17..................4 Bidirectional Counting (24 h Bi) for QoS ..........3 Overhead views···························································································································251 16...........................1...................262 17....11 Performance Monitoring History..........................4 Create/Modify Cross-Connections ····························································································232 15..3 Modify a Cross-Connection ......................................................................................................................262 17...................6 Performance Monitoring on AU-PJE .241 15.........................................265 ED 02 SC........................260 17.............................................................1..........................................1 Activate a Cross-Connection...............237 15.................1.....9 Show Cross-Connected TPs ······································································································248 16 OVERHEAD MANEGEMENT ..............................................................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 7/386 ..............1 Introduction ·································································································································250 16.............250 16...233 15................................243 15.........1 Introduction ·································································································································260 17......5 OH TP creation ····························································································································256 16..................4.....245 15................1..................5...................263 17....................263 17.......................5..............6 Split and Join Cross-Connections ····························································································244 not permitted without written authorization.........................

.9 Display current Data (Ethernet port) ·························································································282 17.......290 18......................................280 17............................1 Overview...........2 Configuration ( SDH Port ) ·········································································································266 17..................................................................................................................................278 17........................................1 MS-SPRING introduction············································································································304 19...................................2 Ethernet physical interface counters .... Passing on and copying of this document.......................................................................................................3.................................................................2 MS-SPRING connection configuration advices ·······································································304 ED 02 SC...............................2.........297 18...........302 18........2....12 Thresholds....................................................304 19....... 17.....................................................265 17...........................................................293 18.......................2................................................2 Modification .............280 17..........................3.................298 18........................6 PM Threshold Table Selection ( SDH Port )··············································································276 not permitted without written authorization..................8 Change T4 <-> T5 ...11 Transmission of SSM Quality Configuration ........................2....................2...............................1 Introduction ·································································································································288 18..4 Flow counter .....271 17.............................................................................299 18..........1 Displaying the Synchronization View ...........3..........................7 PM Threshold Table Creation / Modification / Display ( SDH Port )·······································278 17.... 17...7.......3...........................7....................................................10 Display history Data (Ethernet port) ·························································································284 17..................5 Display History Data ( SDH Port )······························································································274 All rights reserved......................................291 18..............1 Creation ....2 Synchronization Management ···································································································290 18.......................6 SSU Configuration..........................................................7 Remove Timing Reference.....3 Aggregate counter .....3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 8/386 .........................................................288 18..............11 PM Overview································································································································285 18 Synchronization management...................................................9 Change 2MHz ->2Mbit .....................302 18.............................1...............................................2..............................................8 Configuration (Ethernet port)·····································································································281 17...................................4 Synchronization Protection Commands ...270 17.....................................3 Performance Monitoring on ETHRNET port ·············································································269 17......................................................................3 Timing Source Configuration......................................301 18................................12 Show Timing Source ..............2.....................2..........2.......4 Display Current Data ( SDH Port ) ·····························································································272 17........................................3 Display.....................................................................7......................................................296 18..................299 18.............................10 Set and Remove T0 Equal T4 ...2............................................................................................................................. use and communication of its contents 17........270 17..................................................2.2 Synchronization View .........303 19 MS-SPRING MANAGEMENT ........................269 17........2....5 Synchronization Configuration for T0/T4 and T4 squelch criteria ...........................

.....2........2 NE Software package installation procedure .....374 21.........................................1 Naming Conventions .....................................................................................................349 20.........................................................................2. 19...............369 20......................304 19.........2........324 19......3 10/100 Mbit/s fast ETHERNET board ...5 ES1-8FE boards ..................309 19.............................3 Activate.........................................................................................2..............................................................354 20...........4............2.........................2 PR_EA boards.......3 2F MS-SPRing dual protection commands ......................2........1................315 19..........................................................................6 Mib management·························································································································385 ED 02 SC................358 20...................................376 21...........................357 20........................................................................................1 Software Download upgrade .6 ES4-8FE boards ..1 Generalities and descriptions····································································································374 21...............................5...............................................................................................................................8 DVB-ASI board ..........................304 19.......2 Software download operative sequence ··················································································375 21............................5................................................. use and communication of its contents 19.....................2.......375 21...........360 20...................................................................349 20......................4 MS-SPRING Management···········································································································305 19...306 19...................................9 BCE-ETH board...................... 19...4 2F Protection Status Visualization................... Deactivate and Delete commands ..........................2................................................................................................374 21...................................................................4 Gigabit/s ETHERNET board..............2.............316 All rights reserved.......................................4 Init download ·······························································································································382 21..... Passing on and copying of this document..................5 MS-SPRING Protection Status and Commands for 2 fiber terrestrial application ···············316 19.............3 Procedure ..2 Squelching table with 2 fiber Terrestrial applications ..............................................4.....................................................................................................328 20 ISA Port Configuration .....10 Interworking Configuration ..............................2 ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet board TTPs creation··············································································349 20.....1 Operative sequence to configure 2-Fiber MS-SPRING ..............................4...............................1 MS-SPRing Main Configuration ...................................................................2.....366 20............317 not permitted without written authorization.......................................1 Introduction ·································································································································349 20........2..................................352 20.............7 ISA-ES16 board......................3 Software Download Manager menu ··························································································381 21..1 2F MS-SPRing protection commands ..............................................................2........................363 20.........5......3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 9/386 ...............................................376 21......5 SW package Activation and Units information ········································································383 21......2.............................................................................1 2-Fiber MS-SPRING connection configuration advices ........2 External commands (2F) ............................3 Operative sequence to configure MS-SPRING·········································································304 19....3...2....................................................................................................................1 ATM boards ....5..372 21 Software Management.................

................................... External output point configuration dialogue box (MANUAL) ..43 Figure 9........ Set ASAP dialogue box.. External output point configuration dialogue box (FLEXIBLE) ....................................................... ASAPs Management dialogue box....... NE Time dialogue box ............... Expanding or reducing the external points list............................................ Example of abnormal condition list...... Restart NE confirmation...............................................60 Figure 30....... NE management: setting the access state.......................................... Menu options flow chart – 3................................................................48 Figure 14..................................................................... Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profile............................61 Figure 31........................................................................................................................... Passing on and copying of this document.......59 Figure 28.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................63 Figure 33....59 Figure 29................................................................58 Figure 27.......................................41 not permitted without written authorization................53 Figure 21............................................................................ External input point configuration dialogue box................................................................62 Figure 32....................... EML--USM main view organization .................... Opening the external points view..................................................................52 Figure 20....54 Figure 22.......56 Figure 24............................................................... LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES FIGURES Figure 1............................63 ED 02 SC............................................................................. Menu options flow chart -.....................................................................................................51 Figure 18................................................ External points view......58 Figure 26........47 Figure 13........................ Inhibit alarm notification .......1 .....................50 Figure 15.................................................................................................................................................................................................................44 Figure 10.......................................... Consulting and/or setting the local NE time..................42 Figure 8...........................................................................35 Figure 4................................... Set Manager list...........................23 Figure 2...................... Abnormal condition menu option ......... Alarm Surveillance Menu........................57 Figure 25.......................................................................................... NE EML-USM Main view ..52 Figure 19................................................. ......................36 Figure 5... Set SdhNE Alarms Severities ......... Menu options flow chart – 2............ Alarms persistency Configuration Menu option ..........................................34 Figure 3...................................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 10/386 ................................................... Alarm Surveillance.....................................................................................46 Figure 11....... Set ACD level......... Figure 7........................................37 All rights reserved................46 Figure 12........................................ Allow alarm notifications ......................................................................................... use and communication of its contents Figure 6......................55 Figure 23................................................................................ ......................51 Figure 17.............................................. Configuring external points..................50 Figure 16................................. ............................................................................................................................. Alarm re--synchronization............... Alarm persistency Time Configuration................ ASAP Edition dialogue box.................... Menu options flow chart – 4...............................................................

.................... Comm/Routing options ........ IP Address Configuration of Point-to-Point Interfaces ........... Cross Connection Management for DCC dialog .........................................................................................................94 Figure 65.93 Figure 64................................66 Figure 38. OS Configuration ......................................................................................................................................................Rack level (without Fans subrack).................... Equipment Overview -..86 Figure 57.....64 Figure 35.........................................................................................86 Figure 56........................................ Equipment Overview -................................................................................................................................................................................................. LAPD Configuration dialog ..........................................................................................................89 Figure 60..........................................................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 11/386 ..... Select DCC Cross Connection ......................................................Subracks levelz........90 Figure 61.......77 Figure 46.........................85 Figure 55...............................80 Figure 49......................................................... ISA Board IP Address............................................................ OSPF Area Table Configuration ...............................84 Figure 54........... RAP Configuration ...............................98 Figure 69................... Internal Link Monitor ............................. MESA Configuration ...................................82 Figure 52..... use and communication of its contents Figure 43.........................................81 Figure 50..............................92 Figure 62.................................................. TP search dialog.......................................................................... Figure 34..........88 Figure 58..................93 Figure 63.............................................. Main Cross Connection for DCC dialog.....76 Figure 45....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................81 Figure 51............68 Figure 41........................................................................................... Log Browsing option in Network Element context view........................Rack level (with Fans subrack) .......................................................99 ED 02 SC................................ Update DCC Cross Connection list by clicking Search icon ..................................... OSI over IP Tunneling configuration..............................................................................................................................95 Figure 66.........88 Figure 59................................................... Ethernet Configuration...................................................................................................67 Figure 40...... Internal Link Monitor for stand-by Matrix when not synchronized ...........................98 Figure 68.........................................................................................71 Figure 42...........74 not permitted without written authorization.................................... OSI over IP tunneling on QB3 ..................... Remote Inventory completed.............. Remote Inventory confirmation request........... IP Static Routing Configuration.......................96 Figure 67............................................................................. Figure 44.......................................................83 Figure 53.................... IP over OS .......... Confirmation to change LAPD Role........................................................................................................ Complete searching for input and output TP ......................................... Local Configuration............... Example of loopback dialog window management....73 All rights reserved........................................................................80 Figure 48................................................... Ethernet Configuration -...65 Figure 37............................... View Remote Inventory.............................................................67 Figure 39.... Search for DCC Cross Connection Input view ............ NTP Server Configuration.............................................................................................65 Figure 36............. Routing sub domain organization example ............................. Passing on and copying of this document...................... Creation LAPD Interface.................................................................... Equipment Overview............78 Figure 47...............L2 only parameter ..............................

...................................................................................................... PDH and ATM port) ................................................. Subrack level ...................................................................................................................115 Figure 91........116 Figure 92............. Select Printer ....................... The list of different types of optical module (example2) ....................................................... Termination TP box..................................................114 Figure 89................ The list of different types of optical module (example1) ..............................................99 Figure 71.....................................117 Figure 95.............................................. Example of a Port identification and alarm synthesis .........110 Figure 82.......................NE level ............... Example of a SDH Port View.........783 Adaptation TP box..........................................................107 Figure 78..................................................................................123 Figure 102............................................... select the DDM option ......... Physical media menu (SDH port example) .................... AU4 concatenate/deconcatenate commands ............................108 All rights reserved.............................................................103 Figure 74....................................................106 Figure 77...................122 Figure 100...................................................... Connect FAN to CONGI .....126 ED 02 SC..............................................................101 Figure 73........................ The list of different boards relative to an NE slot (example)............................ G......................... Change Physical Interface dialog box ......110 Figure 84.........................................................................125 Figure 105.............................................................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 12/386 .................................................. Change Physical Interface......... Consulting a board’s administrative state.............................. Passing on and copying of this document............................ After “Port Access” selection (example) .....Subrack level .......................................................112 Figure 86............................................................................. Example of a concatenated AU4c ................................... Figure 70.........................................................................................112 Figure 87.................................................................................................................................................................................103 Figure 75................... Example of a concatenated AU4 transmission view ...........................124 Figure 103................109 not permitted without written authorization............... Remote Inventory menu ..................................113 Figure 88.................................... Software Description dialogue box.109 Figure 81................................................ Digital Diagnostic Monitoring dialog box..........................104 Figure 76..................................................................................111 Figure 85........................................................................................................................................................................................................ Automatic Laser Shutdown Management ........... Remove FAN connection from CONGI.....124 Figure 104................................................................ Equipment menu..................120 Figure 98.......................................................................... Figure 80..... Examples of port menu options (SDH..................................................114 Figure 90..................................................................................................................... Modify the module .... Set Retiming enable (after) ......................100 Figure 72.. Board menu options.......... ......................................116 Figure 94.......................122 Figure 101..... Equipment view: select the SDH port on a board...................120 Figure 97................. Equipment Overview -............................................... Set Retiming enable (before)................121 Figure 99... Select Output Format for file................................................................ Remote Inventory dialogue box .................110 Figure 83... .116 Figure 93....................................................................................................... Example of a Board View ..................................................... .................................... use and communication of its contents Figure 79............................119 Figure 96..... Equipment Overview ........................................................

......................... EPS Management dialogue box.............3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 13/386 .... set the selected port mode ................................129 Figure 110.................130 Figure 111............................................................................. Control Path Activation (example on Fast Ethernet board).............................. EPS functional state from protecting active board view ............................................................................150 Figure 132.......................147 Figure 129.... Control Path Activation: Range Path mode...................148 Figure 130...... EPS Management dialogue box..................................................................135 Figure 119...................... Automatic Laser Shutdown Management (after ALS Function delete) ......................................................... View of Monitoring Operations (example) ....154 Figure 135....................................................................................................................................................... Port Mode Overview Dialog.................................................... Single Fiber Configuration View .131 Figure 114.......................................................... TP Frame Mode Configuration .................................... Ethernet Mapping Protocol (EXAMPLE) .......................145 Figure 126........................ Passing on and copying of this document..................132 All rights reserved............................................................................141 Figure 123................................ use and communication of its contents Figure 115................................................................................................... Port Mode Menu Option .....................................................153 Figure 133..............................................................144 Figure 125............................. PDH Line Length Configuration View....156 Figure 140.........................................................................................133 Figure 117....................... LCAS Configuration....................154 Figure 137.............. Ethernet Port Configuration Dialog...................................................................... Gigabit Ethernet port view (example) ..................................................127 Figure 107....................... Information dialog .................. Ethernet Port Configuration options ................................. LCAS Monitoring .....130 Figure 112.............. Figure 106........154 Figure 136.....................147 Figure 128............................132 not permitted without written authorization.................................................................................................. EPS functional state from protected active board view........................................................................................................... Board View Example ..................................................................... EPS overview after Search (Example) ................................................ Visualizing a port optical parameters .........134 Figure 118..................................153 Figure 134...................................................... EPS overview ...................................................... ALS and Laser current state (example)............................................. After “Navigate to Transmission view” selection .......................................................................................................................... EPS: choose protected....................146 Figure 127................................. Figure 116......................... “Navigate to Transmission view” selection.........................................................................................................................................157 ED 02 SC...............................128 Figure 109..................................154 Figure 138.....................143 Figure 124.................... Switching EPS .....138 Figure 121.........................................138 Figure 122.......................................................................................... Consulting EPS ....... EPS: board selection .......................................................................................................................................155 Figure 139...............................................................................156 Figure 141...................150 Figure 131........ Ms Configuration ........ EPS Switch dialogue box ......................................... Configure EPS.............................................................................................................. Bidirectional Transmission on a single fiber........................................................................................131 Figure 113........................135 Figure 120..................128 Figure 108.........................

................................................................................. MSP Management Option ....183 Figure 165............................ MSP Create Option ........................................ MSP schema creation Port dialog ....182 Figure 164.................................................................................... Print to File .........................................................................................178 Figure 160............181 Figure 162.................................................................................................................................................160 Figure 144......................... MSP overview after Search (Example) ............................................. MSP Delete option.................................................................................................. Subrack view after “Open Subrack View” command.......................... Symbols in TP Search..162 Figure 145....... J2 hexadecimal editor ......... MSP Management View..................................................... Initial State ...............................169 Figure 154..................................................................................... Board view after “Open Board View” command.......... Figure 152......................170 Figure 155........................191 ED 02 SC.............................................................................................................................................................171 Figure 156.........................167 Figure 153. J0 Configuration ............................................................165 Figure 149.............. Print to Printer...........184 Figure 167........................187 Figure 173............................................................. Board History Check List.....184 Figure 166................. MSP 1+1 standard protection schema (example)......................176 Figure 159........................................ MSP Commands option .................... TP Search Dialog with Status Information Displayed................................................................................................ TP Search............................................................................ use and communication of its contents Figure 151....................................................... Example Printout ....................................... TP Search Dialog......................................191 Figure 177........190 Figure 176...................................... TP Search Dialog with Different Filtering Options.....187 Figure 172..............164 Figure 148....... High Order TP Configuration.........................................................................................................................189 Figure 175.......................... Port view after “Open Port View” commands ........................................................................186 Figure 169...................................................... Figure 142.............................................................................188 Figure 174.......................... MSP Protection Status Examples ............................. MSP overview...162 Figure 146......................167 not permitted without written authorization.............................................................................................................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 14/386 ................ Low Order TP Configuration......................” Dialog for Search Process ...........................................................................182 Figure 163..................... Passing on and copying of this document..............................................................186 Figure 170.........165 Figure 150........................................................................166 All rights reserved.................................. Transmission menu options ....................................... TP Search Dialog with Various TP Selections .....................................................................179 Figure 161.................................................................................................. Transmission View Area........................................... Information Window................... MSP Schema Deletion ...159 Figure 143.. Symbols Used in Transmission View ......................................................... MSP Commands ...............................................................................................187 Figure 171......................174 Figure 158........................................................................................... J1 hexadecimal editor (example) ......................................172 Figure 157.............................................184 Figure 168...................................................................................................................................................................... “Information............... MSP Schema Creation............................................................163 Figure 147..........

................................208 Figure 198.................................................... SDH Transport Level Diagram ......................................................................................................................................................205 Figure 194...............................................................................221 Figure 210..................................................................... Bidirectional Connection...............................198 Figure 184....................... Expand option.................................................................................... Display of POM and TCM/TCT in Port View (example) .....................................................202 Figure 189.........................204 Figure 192.. Monitor Configuration ........ use and communication of its contents Figure 187....... Cross-Connection Management Dialog (Initial State) ......................222 Figure 211.202 not permitted without written authorization........................... Example of Broadcast Connection with Three Legs ............................227 Figure 212..........................................................................................................196 Figure 181....................................................................................................198 Figure 185................................ Unidirectional Connection ......................................................................................................................220 Figure 206.............. Frame Construction within the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy... Figure 178.............................................................212 Figure 201.221 Figure 208...................203 Figure 191.............................................................................................210 Figure 200....................................................................................... Display of POM and TCM in Port View (example) ...Input Protected..................................... Cross-Connection Management Dialog (After Search)..................221 Figure 209....... Hide option ..................................218 Figure 204........................................................................................................................................ SDH Multiplex Structure according to ITU-T G...........................217 Figure 203................................................ Monitoring Operations .............................................................. Bidirectional Connection ...........................................198 Figure 183.......... Passing on and copying of this document.............197 Figure 182............................................... Port View ...........213 Figure 202.. Port Loopbacks View............................................... PDH Transport Level Diagram ............................................ Loopback Transmission View....................... Cross connection management cascade menu .........................209 Figure 199..........................Normal .................. Port Loopback Configuration............206 Figure 195........................201 All rights reserved....................709 .........................................................220 Figure 207............................................................... Loopback Management................................................... Loopback Management view..... Protected Broadcast.......... Degraded Signal Threshold selection ..194 Figure 180......................................................................229 Figure 213........................................................................ Figure 188............. Navigate to HOA Port....................... Loopback Port View.....................................220 Figure 205................................................................................................................................. Set Domain..........................................207 Figure 196..................................................... Drop and Continue ................................ Board View ............ Bidirectional Connection ..........................................203 Figure 190...........................................................................231 ED 02 SC. Structure TPs option.................................................... Physical Media options............................................................................................. Monitoring Operations Creation/Deletion .....................Input Protected.............................................200 Figure 186................207 Figure 197...........................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 15/386 ............. TP Frame Mode Configuration ................204 Figure 193...........................................................................................193 Figure 179............................................................................................................. Loopback configurations ............................

......................................................................................................................................................... PM History Data view .249 Figure 231...............................266 Figure 240.................................... Overhead options .........................252 Figure 233......259 Figure 238.............274 Figure 247...........................................237 Figure 217. Show Cross Connected VC4 of an AU4 .......................................................................... PM Configuration dialog ............................................................................ Current PM Data Dialog (example) ............................................................................................ use and communication of its contents Figure 223..................... Create an Unprotected Broadcast Cross-Connection........253 Figure 234................................................................. Counter directionality: network centric view ............................... Split/Join to Protected Bidirectional Cross-Connection................................... Far End Performance Monitoring Principles .................258 Figure 237......................................................................... Counter subdivision ......................... Create a Protected Broadcast Cross-Connection . Cross-Connection Icons .......242 not permitted without written authorization.276 Figure 249................. Select Output Format ........................................................................................................247 Figure 228........269 Figure 243............251 Figure 232.........272 Figure 246........................................................................................................................240 Figure 222....267 Figure 241................. PM Configuration Dialog (example) .234 Figure 216.............................................267 Figure 242........................................................................................... Create Cross-Connections ................... Show Cross Connected TPs view .........................................................................256 Figure 235...............................276 ED 02 SC.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. OH TP creation.................................................. PM History Data Dialog (example) ................244 Figure 225............................... Protection Criteria....246 Figure 227.........................................................................................242 All rights reserved... Display Current Data view...............................270 Figure 244................ Configure Monitoring............................239 Figure 220............. OH TP deleting ........... Unprotect a Unidirectional Cross-Connection ....... Creation of a Unidirectional...............................................257 Figure 236.... Create a Bidirectional Protected Cross-Connection.......................... Figure 224.. Cross Connection Management for Overhead dialog ........................................................................................................ Ethernet aggregate counter.......... Non-Protected Cross-Connection............. Select Printer ......................247 Figure 229.......................................................................................................................... Passing on and copying of this document...................................................................................................... PM question dialog box (example) .............271 Figure 245.............................240 Figure 221.............................. Split/Join Unprotected Bidirectional Cross-Connection.......................... Protect one Leg of a Broadcast Connection .........................................................................................................238 Figure 219..........................262 Figure 239.................................... Main Cross-Connection for Overhead dialog ........................................................................................................................................................................................ ........3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 16/386 ............................................... OH Search TP for creation ..................... Protection Actions Dialog .248 Figure 230.........274 Figure 248...........................................................................244 Figure 226.... Figure 214.............................237 Figure 218................................................................233 Figure 215.... Search for Cross-Connection Output ..................................................................... Phone Parameters dialog window......................................................

..... Synchronization source removing ................................................................................300 Figure 279............ Passing on and copying of this document..........................................................................................................285 Figure 263........ SSU Configuration..........................................279 Figure 254..............................................................................................296 Figure 272.............................................278 Figure 253..................................................................................................................................................... PM Overview after add TP .......... Modify PM Threshold Table ............................................301 Figure 281...303 Figure 284....................................................................... PM Configuration dialog .282 Figure 258..............281 Figure 256..................................................................... Transmission SSM Quality ...........................300 Figure 277............................................................ Synch.. Configuring the T0 or T4 SSM algorithm and the squelch criteria ...............................286 Figure 264.............................287 Figure 265............... Lockout................................. Change 2MHz -->2Mbit: command execution.................................... Force and Manual commands .282 Figure 257...................284 Figure 261....... Timing Source Example ......302 Figure 283.................. T4 equal T0 setting.................................................................................................................... Figure 250.....................................................................................299 Figure 276. PM Overview Menu item ......................................298 Figure 274.......303 Figure 285...............................................................................................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 17/386 ....................................... PM Threshold Table Select ................................... Change T4 <-> T5 confirmation message..................................................................................288 Figure 266.. Internal organization of the SETS................... Display History Data ................................................................. use and communication of its contents Figure 259..........................................................................................................................................................300 Figure 278...............................................278 Figure 252........... Change T4 <-> T5: command execution.....................294 Figure 270........ .............. Display MS–SPRing pull down menu.......................................299 Figure 275...................................................... Display Current Data ........ PM Port View........................................................... Add TP for PM Overview......................... Synchronization Menu................... Figure 260........................... Obtaining the synchronization view............................................................................................................... Synchronization source removing confirmation ........... Source configuration for ADM equipment ...............................................................................................................291 Figure 268......................... PM Transmission View .......... Display current data..............................293 Figure 269...................................................................................285 Figure 262.................................................................301 Figure 280......................................302 Figure 282................................. Change T4 <-> T5 menu .....................................................283 All rights reserved.................................................. Create PM Threshold Table .................................................................284 not permitted without written authorization........... PM History Data dialog..................... PM Overview ..................................................................................281 Figure 255.......................................................298 Figure 273................................ Synchronization View Example .................... Change 2MHz -->2Mbit menu ............................................295 Figure 271.............................................................290 Figure 267........................................305 ED 02 SC.......................................................................277 Figure 251................................... Create Ethernet counter ................... Timing source configuration for cross-Connect equipments..... Change 2MHz ->2Mbit confirmation message .......................................................................................

...........318 Figure 310............... Ring protection with a lockout and a ring failure (2F)..... Ring Protection (2F) . Squelching table ...................................... Squelching table of Node D............................................................................................310 All rights reserved..............................................324 Figure 319.......................................327 ED 02 SC.................................................................. West side...................................... Tail-end / head-end protection with a lockout working and a one direction failure (2F).........319 Figure 311..........324 Figure 317.................................313 Figure 300.. East side....................................311 not permitted without written authorization................................................ Node Id and associated ring node position ...................................................................................... Figure 296.......................................................................... Figure 286.................................................... Connections of the ring ............... Example of confirmation dialog box .......314 Figure 302....................... Forced and Manual Commands (2F) ........................315 Figure 305....... Ring map configuration ........... Squelching table of Node B.............326 Figure 321................................... Squelching table of Node C.......... Clear WTR command (2F) ........314 Figure 303....................................................................................................... Automatic protection (tail/head) for double ring failure visualization...306 Figure 288............................................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 18/386 ..............................................322 Figure 314............................................................................................................................................................ Automatic protection Bridge/Switch (2F)........317 Figure 307...........................................320 Figure 312.......322 Figure 315...... Example of error message ................................................ MS-SPRing Management dialog box ..... West side ........ Passing on and copying of this document........... East side.....313 Figure 301..............................308 Figure 291.......................................................323 Figure 316......... Squelching table of Node A.....................................309 Figure 293........................... Squelching table of Node C.............325 Figure 320............ Lockout command and non-served failures (2F)................................. Lockout commands (2F)...................................................................................................................................... Example of a ring traffic....... East side ... Examples of Double ring failure ......................................................................................312 Figure 298....... Squelching table of Node A.............................307 Figure 289....................................................................................................................................317 Figure 308............321 Figure 313................................................................................... West side......................... use and communication of its contents Figure 295...................... West side .................................312 Figure 299.......................................................................................... Ring network reference scheme (2F) ............... Protection and working channels where the lockout command can be activated (2F) .........................................................................310 Figure 294................. Squelching table of Node D..... WTR dialog box .................324 Figure 318..... Confirmation message ......................................................................309 Figure 292.......................................................................................................316 Figure 306................ Protection states and commands "Idle" status (2F) ............................ Manual and Force Span/Ring command (2F) . Ring Protection with Force and Manual commands (2F) ............................... Creation Schema dialog box .............................................315 Figure 304......................................................................................308 Figure 290.... Tail-end / Head-end association................................................306 Figure 287...........318 Figure 309...........................................311 Figure 297................... East side ............................................. Activated MS-SPRing Management.............. Squelching table of Node B......................................

..............................................346 Figure 338................... PR_EA MATRIX (with defined TPs) ...............345 Figure 337. Automatic working ring and Lockout Protection (reference point-OS-RN)................................................................... ISA-ES16 MATRIX (with defined TPs) ..... Tail / head dual "Events" Protection table (2F) ................... Visualization of the Lockout command Statuses (2F) ........ use and communication of its contents Figure 331..................................................... ETH–MB (initial empty fieds).... PR_EA MATRIX (initial empty fields) ................................. Figure 332........................ ISA-ES16 MATRIX (initial empty fields) ............... ES1-8FE MATRIX (with defined TPs) .......... Protection status with double ring failure (reference point -SS-AN).......... Protection status with double ring failure (reference point-OS-AN) ..........347 Figure 339.................335 Figure 329................................................................ Navigate to ETH port view (example)....................336 Figure 330...............................................................................331 Figure 325.......................355 Figure 347..................................... Navigate to ATM port view (example) ........................356 Figure 348............................................................................ ETH–MB (with defined TPs)......... ES4-8FE MATRIX (with defined TPs) ................. Passing on and copying of this document.......357 Figure 349..........351 Figure 342..............................364 Figure 356..........359 Figure 351........337 All rights reserved.......... Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference point-SS-RN)........................ Visualization of the Forced / Manual protection Statuses (2F) ................................................................................................................................. ATM 4X4 MATRIX (initial empty fields) ..............................................354 Figure 345..............................................................................344 Figure 336........................................333 Figure 327.................................................................................................. Navigate to ETH port view (example)................. Automatic working ring and Force Ring (reference point-SS-AN) ...................................................355 Figure 346.......................... Protection status with double ring failure (reference point-OS-AN) recovering to "idle" .341 Figure 334............................................................362 Figure 353............... ATM 4X4 MATRIX (with defined TPs). ES1-8FE MATRIX (initial empty fields) ............... Visualization of Automatic Protection Statuses (2F) ..............365 ED 02 SC. Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference point-SS-SN)........ Double manual ring command (reference point-SS-AN)......... Control Path activation window (example) .................................................................334 Figure 328...... Figure 322............ Protection status with double ring failure (reference point-SS-RN) .................. MPLS port view example..............................352 Figure 343............... ETHERNET port view example .....364 Figure 357.........339 not permitted without written authorization..................................343 Figure 335..........................................................................350 Figure 341.......... Navigate to ETH port view (example).......................................................................350 Figure 340................................................................................................................................................................330 Figure 324..........................359 Figure 350.............................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 19/386 ............... Double manual ring command (reference point-OS-AN) .......................................363 Figure 355........ Automatic working ring and Manual Ring (reference point-OS-AN) .............332 Figure 326..............362 Figure 354..........................................328 Figure 323......360 Figure 352......................................................... ES4-8FE MATRIX (initial empty fields) ....................................................................................................... Automatic working ring and Lockout working Ring (reference point-SS-SN).. Manual command applied at the "Reference Point" ring network....353 Figure 344............................340 Figure 333.................................................

...................................................................278 Table 9..... Software Package Information dialogue box (example)............. ASI-ABNC access card view example ................ Equipment view .................................381 Figure 374............................ Figure 358.......................................................................................................219 Table 6...............................................379 Figure 372...................................... DWDM SFP module wavelength corresponding channel number...... Download menu................................................................ Enhanced software package (SDH + ATM) ...... NE MIB management .......................105 Table 2................................................................... Example of DVB-ASI TPs creation............ OMSN enhanced software package creation (part A)... Software Package Administration view .............................................................. Default value for C2/V5 Signal Label .. ATM software package installation (example) .......................................................................................................................................................... OMSN enhanced software package creation (part B)...................................369 Figure 362............................................................ DCC Interworking configuration ....................................................171 Table 3........... MSP commands and Auto-switch protection priority .............................................................................................. Figure 368............................................................235 Table 7..................371 Figure 364........................241 Table 8......................................................................... Software Download general principle................ Control Path activation window (example) ...............................380 Figure 373............................................................................ Example of BCE-ETH TPs creation ............................... Threshold table entities association................385 Figure 379........................ PDH TPs ...377 not permitted without written authorization........................................................366 Figure 359..376 All rights reserved........................................................................................386 TABLE Table 1..................................................................................................................................372 Figure 365............................................ SDH TPs .....383 Figure 377..................................................................189 Table 4....368 Figure 361................................................370 Figure 363......................................................................................... Software download in progress (example)........................................280 ED 02 SC......................................................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 20/386 .......................382 Figure 376...... Passing on and copying of this document.................................................................................................................377 Figure 369.................................378 Figure 370.............................384 Figure 378.............................................. Detail software package (example) ....... Maximum Performance Parameter Values ............................... SDH software package installation.... use and communication of its contents Figure 367.......................367 Figure 360..............379 Figure 371............ SW Downloading dialogue box example.......... Modifiable Parameters .. BCE-ETH access card view example.................................................................................. Optional and Mandatory Configurable Parameters for Cross-Connection Creation.........381 Figure 375................................. Control Path activation window (example) ................................................................374 Figure 366............218 Table 5................................................................... Software Administration menu ..................

1.Introduction manual 1.1.2 Glossary of terms Refer to the Section Introduction manual.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 21/386 .1 Scope 1. use and communication of its contents This document is intended for the operators whose role is to manage the Network Elements.1 Document scope The aim of this document is to help the operator understand.2. The different functionalities related to the equipment views. Passing on and copying of this document. using the Craft Terminal (CT). configure and manipulate Network Elements (NEs) easily. 1 INTRODUCTION 1. The documents that should be read before starting this document are: --.1 Acronyms and abbreviations Refer to the Section Introduction manual. 1.1. ED 02 SC.2.2 Target audience All rights reserved. The menu items and the different actions that can be undertaken from these views are described in detail. not permitted without written authorization.1320CT Basic Operator’s Handbook The documents of this Handbook that should be read before starting this document are: --.2 Terminology 1.

ED 02 SC. that differs according the NE type: -. 2. then the accessible menu options are listed. is described. z Domain alarm synthesis. Passing on and copying of this document. The view organization is detailed in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator Handbook to which refer for the description. z Severity alarm synthesis.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 22/386 . First is introduced the view organization. except for the following information. z Management status control panel z View title. use and communication of its contents It contains the following fields. Equipment. Information about the alarms and status is given in the Maintenance section of this handbook.Domain alarm synthesis The different alarm domain type in which can be subdivided the NE is: Synchronization. All rights reserved. which provide you with information needed to manage the NE: not permitted without written authorization. presented after the NE login.1 EML--USM view organization The EML--USM view (see Figure 1) is the first window presented to the operator after the login. and Transmission. z View area z Message/state area The Menu bar and the View area contained in the same NE view permits to perform all the configuration and supervision and display the specific selected item. External Point. At the end some further advice are given for Navigation principles. 2 GENERAL INTRODUCTION ON VIEWS AND MENUS In this chapter the organization of the EML--USM screen.

In the menu bar there are permanent menu items always displayed.. The flow charts of Figure 2. To navigate among the views and set TMN and Overhead parameters. Figure 1.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 23/386 . the menus are: • Permanent Menus • Views (first column).. Staring from the left. • Configuration (second column). Figure 4. Figure 5. They are not presented according the menu option sequence but according a functional subdivision.. From chapter 3 on details and operative information on the all the views are given. ED 02 SC.2 Introduction on the EML--USM menu options The menu bar allows performing configuration and supervision functions on the Network Element. Figure 3. summarize the menu options.. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. This paragraph lists all the menu options and then more details on the relevant contained entries. For each of them the relevant operative functions are briefly introduced. EML--USM main view organization 2. Passing on and copying of this document.

remote inventory internal link monitor). From the Equipment menu is also possible to start the Specific Terminal application for the ATM/IP traffic configuration. • Diagnosis (third column). All rights reserved. only when a particular object or option is selected. Craft Terminal enabling). setting the relevant configuration.e. To manage the NE software (download. To manage the EPS protection. To set general configuration of the NE. setting the relevant configuration. in the menu bar there are other menus. MIB management). setting the boards. To set the supervision states (i. • Supervision (fourth column). Further. EPS and cross-connection). ED 02 SC. setting the relevant configuration. use and communication of its contents • Download (sixth column). performance monitoring. • EPS (seventh column). To manage the NE as a whole. It also permits to manage the MSP protection setting the relevant configuration. • Board (eighth column).3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 24/386 . The menu permits to define all the Cross Connections and manages the transmission resources. To activate the help. To show the physical port available in a specific board. It is the entry point for the Port view. • Help (last column). • Transmission (seventh column). • Port (seventh column). presented as an alternative. set TMN and Overhead parameters and to show or modify some parameters (performance monitoring. • MS_SPRing (fifth column) To manage the 2-fiber MS_SPRing protection. From the Equipment view the Board view can be accessed. To set and show (detailed alarm view) the transmission resources referred to the Port. ATM/IP/ETH creation. Further access the Performance Monitoring and permits navigation to the Board view. thus having an overview of the complete signal flow of the various port. which compose it. • Other Menus • Equipment (eighth column). not permitted without written authorization. It permits to show and set the Termination Point of the equipment. Passing on and copying of this document. To get information about the NE (alarms. MSP. It also permits to manage the MSP protection setting the relevant configuration.

The "Synchronization" menu is then available on the menu bar • Refresh: The aim of the refresh feature is to avoid a misalignment between the CT and the managed NE. ED 02 SC. This misalignment is due to a loss of notifications coming from the NE.2. by means of the following entries: • Alarm Severities: Manage the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile. To show and modify housekeeping (environmental) alarms. It is equivalent to a double click on the selected object in the view area. Used to define the PM parameters. • Open Object: Navigate and show the contents of the selected object: the current view change.2. • Transmission: Open the Transmission view.2 Configuration menu introduction This menu permits to set general configuration of the NE and to show or modify some parameters. All rights reserved. • Loopback Management: Enter the loopback management. The "Transmission" menu is then available on the menu bar. • External Points: Open the External Point view. • Set ACD level: • Cross Connection Management: Manage the connection of the paths. opening the following menu options: . • Open in Window: Navigate and show the contents of the selected object. To show and modify synchronization parameters. The "External Point" menu is then available on the menu bar. Passing on and copying of this document. 2. • Synchronization: Open the Synchronization view.Threshold table • EPS overview: Allows displaying as well as search for EPS states. • NE Time: Display and set the NE local time. • External Points (seventh column). without stopping the supervision of the NE 2. use and communication of its contents • Equipment: Open the Equipment view. The "Equipment" menu and the "EPS" menu are then available on the menu bar. • Close: Close the EML-USM view. The current view doesn't change but a new window with a new view is opened. • Synchronization (seventh column).3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 25/386 . by means of the following entries: • Backward: Go back to the previous view. Used to configure the loopback command for commissioning or maintenance purposes. • Forward: Go to the next view. • Performance: Manage the Performance Monitoring domain. not permitted without written authorization. • Set Alarm severities: Send the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile to the selected object • Set SdhNe Alarm severities: Send the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile referred to the equipment level.1 Views menu introduction This menu permits to navigate among the views and set some parameters.

. OH TP creation . Passing on and copying of this document. IP Static Routing Configuration . Used to define the parameters for NE and OS in the TMN. OSPC Area Configuration . OSI Over IP . . • ISA Port Configuration: It allows to create the TPs for the ISA and DVB-ASI connections • Interworking Configuration: It allows to manage the interworking between this NE and the 1850TSS-3 equipments (Ethernet in-band management). Subtree alarms . Ethernet Configuration • OSI Routing Configuration All rights reserved. . IP over OSI • Overhead: Handle the operation on the Overhead bytes. . use and communication of its contents . opening the following menu options: • Local configuration • OS Configuration • NTP Server Configuration • Interfaces Configuration . OH Cross Connection .3 Diagnosis menu introduction This menu permits to get information about the NE. 2. RAP Configuration not permitted without written authorization. . . . LAPD Configuration . Used to define the parameters in the following menu options: . . . ISA board IP address • Tunneling Configuration . OH TP deleting • MSP overview: Allows displaying as well as search for MSP states. . . Equipment alarms ED 02 SC. . Object alarms . It opens the following menu options: . IP Address Configuration of point-to-point interfaces . . NE alarms . . • Comm/Routing: Enter the Communication and Routing management. . .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 26/386 .2. MESA Configuration • IP Configuration . . OH Phone Parameter . . • PM overview: Allows displaying performance overview. by means of the following entries: • Alarms: Display the Alarms Surveillance information of the NE. .

Requested • Alarms: Manage the alarms supervision of the NE. It opens the following menu options: . • Mib management: Permits backup of NE software configuration and restore of backup file. protection board) All rights reserved. 2. by means of the following entries: • Access State: Manage the supervision access to the NE. Event Log . . with CT or OS. • Dataflow Analyzer. 2. previously stored in the Craft Terminal by means the "upload remote inventory" performed in the "Supervisory" menu. Allow / Inhibits Notifs. . . by means of the following entries: ED 02 SC. Resynchronize.6 Download menu introduction This menu permits to manage the NE software.4 Supervision menu introduction This menu permits to set the supervision states of the NE. . . setting the boards. . • Upload Remote Inventory: Store the Remote Inventory data in the Craft Terminal. • Set Manager list • Restart NE: Reset the NE software. Software Trace Log • View Remote Inventory: Display the remote inventory data. which compose it. 2. It opens the following menu options: . External Points alarms • Log Browsing: Manage the events stored in the NE. ALS Handler. use and communication of its contents and the name of the boards that are in abnormal condition. • Abnormal Condition list Display the list of the object class (Loopback. by means of the following entries: • Init download: Manage the software download.7 Equipment menu introduction This menu permits to manage the NE as a whole. • Units info: Show the status of the software package installed in the NE memory banks. . .2. upgrading the NE. setting the relevant configuration. . by means of the following entries: Main dialog for MS-SPRing management: Contains all the command to set and manage the MS-SPRing 2.5 MS-SPRing menu introduction This menu permits to age the 2-fiber and 4-fiber MS-SPRing protection (the last is not operative in current release). Passing on and copying of this document. It opens the following menu options: .2. Alarm Log . Transmission alarms . not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 27/386 . .2.2. . • Internal Link Monitor: Indicates the preference of failure on Rx or Tx side for the signal incoming/outgoing from/to the active/standby MATRIX board. OS .

• Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper equipment level. • Set in service: Insert a lock symbol in the board. . • Connect FAN to CONGI #1: Enable the management of the Fan subrack alarms on CONGI inserted in slot 1. N.B. Board level • ISA Board IP Address: Used to define the ISA board IP address N. • Set: Add or change the board type (a list is proposed). This option is available only after having selected a CONGI board at Subrack level view. In these views are presented only the TP specific of the port.B. Subrack level . • ISA Port Configuration: It allows creating the TPs for the ATM/IP/ETH connections. 2. This option is available only at Subrack view level. enabling changes.8 Board menu introduction This menu permits to show the physical port available in a specific board (alarm synthesis and port symbol) and to access the port view. • Remote Inventory: Show the Remote Inventory data inserted in the equipment.1 optical module) • Remove: Remove the board. The menu differs according the port type (SDH.2. but the available menu permits to configure the port (many setting options listed in the port menu are common with the "Transmission" view).9 Port menu introduction This menu permits to set and show the transmission resources (TP) referred to the Port. 2. • Set out of service Delete the lock symbol in the board.B. Passing on and copying of this document. by means of the entries indicated in the following list. • Change Physical Interface: Change the SPI or PPI object into PPI or SPI (and vice versa) on the bi- mode port (140Mbit/s / STM-1 switch able). HOA. . • Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper subrack level. The "Port view" is reached by means the Equipment menu and Board view to check the detailed alarms presented.B. IP and ETHERNET). N. ATM. It is only possible between compatible board or modules (ex.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 28/386 . • Connect FAN to CONGI # 20: Enable the management of the Fan subrack alarms on CONGI inserted in slot 20. This option is available only after having selected a CONGI board at Subrack level view. . by means of the following entries: • Port Access: Access the "Port view". PDH. it is possible to change from an Long and Short 1. • Modify: Change the board type without previously remove it. This menu is available only if an ATM/IP/ETH board has been equipped in the subrack.2. It opens the following All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents menu options: not permitted without written authorization. • Reset: Not operative. • Software description: Show information on the software of the board. ED 02 SC. N.

. . It permits navigation to the Transmission view. MSP Delete • Physical Media: Manage the physical setting of the TP of the ports. Port Loopback Configuration . . . . SUT . Only for SDH ports view. Not applicable to HOA port. It opens the following options: . Used to configure the loopback command for commissioning or maintenance purposes: . All rights reserved. . Modify Cross Connection • Monitoring Operation: Set parameters for POM. Display History Data • Loopback: Enter the loopback management. . It opens a menu which differs according the port type: • SDH port: . • Set Retiming: Set the retiming feature applies to the outgoing 2Mbit/s.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 29/386 . . Show Optical Configuration . . Creation / Deletion . . . . . It opens the following menu options: . . MSP Commands . Cross Connection Management . Not available for PDH port. . It opens the following menu options: . . • TP configuration: Set parameters for the Overhead (Signal Label and Path Trace) on Synchronous TP's. It opens the following menu options: . Configure Monitoring . ALS Management . . It opens the following options: not permitted without written authorization. MSP Create . TX Quality Configuration ED 02 SC. Display Current Data . • TP Threshold Configuration: Set B2 excessive BER and Signal Degraded parameter. . MSP Management . Create Cross Connection . . use and communication of its contents • Cross Connection: Manage the connection of the paths. Enable . • TP Frame Mode Configuration: Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G. Configuration • Performance: Set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. Loopback management • MSP: Manage the Multiplex Section Protection of the NE. Passing on and copying of this document.703/704 or ISDN-PRA management. Disable • AU4 Concatenation: Only for SDH ports views. .

2. Control Path Activation • Show supporting board: Navigate to the upper board level. . Ethernet Port Configuration . Ms Configuration • PDH port: . LAPD Configuration . The menu lists the following entries: • Add TP: Search and add TP to the transmission view. Remote Laser Management not permitted without written authorization.2.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 30/386 . Single Fiber Configuration . Passing on and copying of this document. Line Length Configuration . . . • Switch: Manage the EPS operator commands (Force. It permits navigation to the Port view. .11 Transmission menu introduction This menu permits to show and set the Termination Point of the equipment. . The menu permits to define all the Cross Connections and manages the transmission resources. use and communication of its contents . HDSL Configuration . . It opens the following menu options: . setting the relevant configuration. . than presented in the screen. . Further access the Performance Monitoring and manage Multiplex Section Protections and Loopbacks functions. opening all TP's • Navigate to monitoring view: permit to show for a selected TP the related POM/SUT/TCM and TCT object if present. NT G703/704 Configuration . Next level of lower TP ED 02 SC. Manual. ISA Port Configuration . . Lockout) 2. . thus having an overview of the complete signal flow of the various port. . . • Navigate to Transmission view: permit to show a complete overview about the signal flow. 2. .10 EPS menu introduction This menu permits to manage the EPS protection. NT X21 Configuration • ETHERNET port: All rights reserved. . ALS Management . . • Configure: Set revertive / not revertive and WTR parameters. by means of the following entries: • Management: Set EPS protections. Ethernet Mapping protocol . . setting the relevant configuration. • Expand: Display the TP's related to a selected TP.

TU3. Next level of upper TP . . TU12. ALS Management . . Port Switch Over . • Terminate TP: Terminate the AU4-CTP paths. All rights reserved. Modify Cross Connection . . Loopback management • Physical Media: Manage the TP physical setting.703/704 or ISDN-PRA management. Create Cross Connection . It opens the following menu options: . Upper TP . SUT. All upper TP • Hide: Remove the TP from the screen of the Transmission view. . Show Cross Connected TP's • Monitoring Operation: Set parameters for POM. . . Passing on and copying of this document. It opens the following menu options: . VC12) • Loopback : Enter the loopback management. Display History Data • Structure TP's: Define the structure of a selected TP (TU2. use and communication of its contents Only for PDH ports views. Selected TP • TP configuration: Set parameters for the Signal Label and Path trace. . . Show Optical Configuration . . • Disterminate TP: Disterminate the AU4-CTP paths. Used to configure the loopback command for commissioning or maintenance purposes: It opens the following menu options: . It opens the following menu options: . . TX Quality Configuration ED 02 SC. It opens the following menu options: . . • TP Threshold configuration: Set B2 Ex BER and Signal Degrade threshold. . . Lower TP . VC3/VC4.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 31/386 . Configure Monitoring . Display Current Data . Cross Connection Management . . All lower TP . . • Cross Connection: Manage the connection of the paths. Configuration • Performance: Set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. . . It opens the following menu options: . . Creation / deletion . Port Loopback Configuration . . . not permitted without written authorization. . • TP Frame Mode Configuration: Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G. . • AU4 Concatenation: Only for SDH ports views.

MSP Create not permitted without written authorization. • Set T0 Equal T4 • Remove T0 Equal T4 • Transmitted SSM Quality Configuration: Set SSM quality transmitted on the selected T1 SDH timing reference. Passing on and copying of this document.2. . Set Domain . .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 32/386 . WTR and Squelch Criteria on the T4 synchronization source. setting the relevant configuration. • Remove Timing Reference • Change T4<->T5: Change the synchronization physical interface from 2MHz (T4) to 2Mbit/s (T5) without traffic” and vice versa. X21 Configuration • MSP: Manage the Multiplex Section Protection of the NE. • T0 TEST Configuration: Not used. . • Protection Command: Manage commands (force. .12 Synchronization menu introduction This menu permits to set and show the Synchronization parameters and status. • SSU Configuration: Set NE single or with SSU. NT Configuration . ED 02 SC. MSP Management . . NE MSP synthesis • Show supported board: Navigate to the board supporting the selected TP • Navigate to Port view: Navigate to the port supporting the selected TP 2. • Change 2MHx->2Mbit: Change the source of a protection unit from 2Mhz to 2Mbit and vice versa. manual. MSP Commands . . • T0 Configuration: Enable/disable SSM and WTR on the T0 synchronization source. . • Frame Mode Configuration: Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G. . • T4 Configuration: Enable/disable SSM. Regeneration Section management . . Single Fiber Configuration . HDSL Configuration . by means of the following entries: • Timing Source Configuration: Set timing source priority and quality for the selected input reference. use and communication of its contents . lockout) for the selected timing reference. Only for PDH ports views. Extra traffic . . . . . • Show Timing Source: Show the "port view" related to the selected timing reference. Line Length Configuration . . MSP Delete . . It opens the following menu options: All rights reserved.703/704 or ISDN-PRA management.

. ED 02 SC. Show all external Points All rights reserved. by means of the following entries: • Configuration: Set the input/output environmental alarm. . It opens the following menu options: . • Display: Show the list of the input/output environmental alarm. Show external Output Points .2. 2. Show external Input Points .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 33/386 . . Passing on and copying of this document.13 External Points menu introduction This menu permits to display and set the input/output environmental alarm (housekeeping alarm). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.

ED 02 Figure 2. Passing on and copying of this document. All rights reserved.1 3AL 98325 ADAA 34/386 .3: NE MANAGEMENT Menu options flow chart -. SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.

Passing on and copying of this document. All rights reserved. ED 02 Figure 3. SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT Menu options flow chart – 2 3AL 98325 ADAA 35/386 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.

SC. All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT Menu options flow chart – 3 3AL 98325 ADAA 36/386 . Passing on and copying of this document. ED 02 Figure 4.

In this paragraphs are instead inserted menu options typical for this NE involved in Navigation and example of Navigation. Menu options flow chart – 4 2. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 5. To reach a particular view of the NE there are several ways (navigation is also possible mixing the different ways): • Double click on the selected object • Select the object and use the Open object or Open in Window option of the View pull down menu • Use the Menu option tree structure.3 Advices on Navigation principles Navigation rules are the same for all the NE using the same Craft Terminal Info Model. This general rules are described in the "Basic Craft Terminal Operator Handbook".3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 37/386 . The View pull down menu permits to show the following menus: ED 02 SC. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved.

Double clicking on the objects performs the navigation through different levels of the NE hierarchy: • The first level shows the subrack level of the Equipment view • By double clicking on a board body. . Navigation is done from higher to lower levels. . . .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 38/386 . Passing on and copying of this document. immediately after the NE login. The Equipment view enables a fast navigation through all levels of the equipment hierarchy. Views Navigation The first level of the "Equipment view" representation will be displayed directly into the current window. the port level of the Equipment view can be reached.Port Access pull down menu Open Port . from "port view" to “board view" or to "transmission view") thus facilitating the operators activity. The NE hierarchy is generally organized in the following way: Subrack > board > port > TP. . Transmission . by double clicking on a port body contained in the board. EXAMPLE: to obtain the "Create Cross Connection" window: • First navigation path: Open View .Cross Connection Management pull down menu Select Create option in the presented window The menu structure also permits to pass from a view menu to another (i. by selecting the Backward option from the views menu . Go back to the previous view. External Points The menu structure permits to open the same window following several menu paths. • Second navigation path: Open View .Create Cross Connection pull down menu • Third navigation path: Open Configuration .Transmission pull down menu Open Transmission . Equipment . .e.Equipment pull down menu Double click on Board Select the Board to access the Board view Open Board .Cross Connection .Cross Connection . use and communication of its contents option in the presented window not permitted without written authorization. the board level of the Equipment view can be reached. • Further. • It is possible to go back to the upper level of representation by pressing the <ESC> key on the keyboard.Cross Connection Management pull down menu Select Create All rights reserved. by selecting the Forward option from the view menu. ED 02 SC. It is also possible to: . Synchronization . . Go to the next view. The port view displays the inner TPs.

named SRFAN (Example) The Fans Subrack presence is managed with the Set option as for the boards of the 1662SMC Subrack. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. In the Rack Level view two subrack are presented: . At the bottom the Fans Subrack. ED 02 SC. the Rack level view (Example) is presented. N.B. selecting in the Rack level view the Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu. the Equipment level view is presented. Selecting in the first level of the Equipment view the Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu. (Example) Further. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 39/386 . All rights reserved. At the top the 1662SMC subrack. named SR62C (Example) .

local access. The EML-USM Main view is presented as for the following figure. All rights reserved.1 NE management states The elementary building blocks of any telecommunication network are the Network Elements (NEs). etc). 3 NE MANAGEMENT SUPERVISION This chapter is dedicated to the NE states and NE access. as described in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator's Handbook. 3. The Network Element Synthesis views enable you to work on local or remote NE. Any disruption in the communication link between the CT and the NE results in an update of the management states when the CT has detected the communication failure.2 NE supervision and login The Network Element Synthesis views enable you to get access to the current NE EML-USM view described in this handbook. All the information referred to the management states are inserted in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbook. 3. not permitted without written authorization. ED 02 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 40/386 . selecting it and activating "Supervision" and "Login". Passing on and copying of this document. Operating with the Craft Terminal the NE can present different management states according to the condition of the connection (supervision. Also general Alarm status is presented. connection state. use and communication of its contents Management states are present at Network Element Synthesis view level and at USM--EML view level.

ED 02 Figure 6.3: NE MANAGEMENT NE EML-USM Main view 3AL 98325 ADAA 41/386 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. SC.

NE management: setting the access state. To control the competition of the OS and the CT. etc).1 Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access) The Craft Terminal can manage by the OS or the NE.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 42/386 . Figure 7. However the OS does continue to provide a certain number of services. ED 02 SC. Passing on and copying of this symbol has a rectangular shape. The request is up to the OS. document. 4 NE MANAGEMENT GENERAL CONFIGURATION In this chapter general configuration referred to the equipment management are described (Craft Terminal access. NE Time. • Performance processing on TPs. The access state of an NE can be modified from two types of views: 4. In the view the icon with a key All rights reserved. If the LAC is "granted" that means the CT is allowed to manage the NE. 4. If the LAC is "access denied" that means the OS manages the NE and the CT is not allowed to modify NE configuration (it can only "read"). From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the "Craft access" operation using the Yes or No push buttons. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Alarms configuration. In the view the icon with a key symbol has a circular shape.1. • Switching back to the OS access state. a Local Access Control (LAC) is available. If the OS doesn't answer in a predefined time it is assumed that the NE is in the Craft access state and can be managed from a Craft Terminal. If the LAC is "requested" that means the CT has requested permission from the OS and is waiting for a replay.1 Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then select the Requested option from the Access State cascading menu as shown in the following figure. which accept or refuse it. These services includes: • Reception and processing of alarms.

The OS now manages the NE.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 43/386 . From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the "OS access" operation. option from the Configuration pull down menu.. Then select the OS. The key symbol icon on the management states of the NE view indicates whether the OS manages by a craft terminal or the NE.2 Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state Select the Supervision pull down menu. Passing on and copying of this document. Local Craft Terminal access is denied on recovery phase after a loss of communication of the NE. option from the Access State.B. In this view the OS indication identifies the Craft Terminal. Figure 8. Consulting and/or setting the local NE time The following dialogue box is opened from which you can get and/or set the local NE time and check the NTP Status.B. N. All rights reserved. the OS automatically recovers the communication and put the state that was set before the loss of communication (therefore the Craft Terminal access can be denied or granted).. N.2 NE Time management The NE local time of a selected NE can be visualized and/or re-aligned on the OS time basis. 4. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The status of the Network Time Protocol can be checked Select the NE Time.1. 4. ED 02 SC... When communication is lost with the NE.

NE Time dialogue box The following fields are available: • NTP Status section (read only) with the following parameters: ƒ NTP protocol It can be enabled (in the NTP Server Configuration) or disabled or empty (grey). • Time section with the following data: ƒ NE Time and OS Time It displays (read only) the time of the Network Element and of the OS (Craft Terminal). NTP Main and NTP Spare will be reachable or unreachable. • NTP protocol disabled ED 02 SC. ƒ Set NE Time With OS Time It permits to align the NE time with the time of the Craft Terminal. Figure 9. When both are reachable the NE uses the Main. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 44/386 .All rights reserved. The Set NE Time With OS Time message is not operative and the user cannot set manually the NE Time. ƒ NTP Main and NTP Spare It displays the status of the Main and Spare NTP: reachable or unreachable. Passing on and copying of this document. Two different operative conditions can be defined: • NTP protocol enabled In this case.

The OS time comes from the PC date configuration that corresponds to the legal GMT time. the NTP Main and NTP Spare are empty (grey).” c) Select one of the “user” profile (#10001 or #10002) and click on “Modify” d) Click on the “Probable Cause Families” associated to the alarm e) Select the relevant alarm in the list of “Probable Cause Name” f) In the “Service affecting/non-affecting” fields select the needed severity (critical/major/minor…) g) Click on “OK” h) Click on “Close” i) Select the relevant TP and then “Configuration” -> “Set Alarms Severities…” j) In the box that appears select the just modified ASAP (eventually check it by means of “Detail”) k) Click on “OK” 4.1 Procedure to modify an ASAP a) Select the TP (or board/port/etc…) whose ASAP is to be changed b) From the menu click on “Configuration” -> “alarms Severities…. • The Severity of the alarm. predefined or settable by the operator.3 Alarm Configuration The operations described in this chapter. All rights reserved. the OS system re-aligns the time of all supervised NEs periodically and automatically with a configured periodicity. you will force the change.e.3.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 45/386 . This section deals with the configuration of ASAPs. • Allow/Inhibit alarm notification. are: • Alarm Severity Assignment Profile management. • Alarm re-synchronization 4. This periodicity is common for all the NEs.1 Alarm Severities This option permits to configure and display the ASAP.3. However it will not have any effect on the periodic and automatic mechanism. Passing on and copying of this document.3. If you do not want to set the NE local time. In this case. Three important notions are: • The Probable Cause of the alarm. click on the Close push button to close the dialogue box.B. 4. mainly related to alarm setting. If you set the NE time. with an immediate effect on the NE. • The Alarm Type (communication alarm.2. To re-align the NE time on the OS time basis click in the Set NE Time With OS Time radio button and either click on the Apply push button to validate or on the Close push button to cancel and close the dialogue box. change the NE time with the Time of the Craft Terminal). 4. N. ED 02 SC. An ASAP is a list of Alarm probable causes to which Severities Profiles are assigned. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. the Set NE Time With OS Time message is operative and the user can set manually the NE Time (i.2 Alarm Severity Assignment Profile Management (ASAP) Managed entities yield alarms when they malfunction. When the NTP is not present. equipment alarm).

. Passing on and copying of this document. This ASAP enables the emission of all: .e. Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profile The ASAP Management dialogue box is displayed. Equipment alarms ED 02 SC. The default presented profiles is: • Profile “No alarms”. option from the Configuration pull down menu. Figure 11. the AIS & RDI alarms are not alarmed) . . Whit this profiles all the alarms are enabled (only Software Download Failure is not alarmed)... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Select the Alarm Severities. All rights reserved. This ASAP enables the emission of all alarms. ASAPs Management dialogue box. • Profile “No Remote Alarms” shows the alarm criterion configuration defined for "path alarms" (only AIS and RDI and Software Download Failure are not alarmed).3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 46/386 . Communication Alarms (i. Figure 10.

(Battery Degraded. .e. Communication Alarms (i.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 47/386 . For ASAP "10001" it is then possible to choose Detail. ED 02 SC. NOTE: if this profile is not already present in the list. Modify. ASAP Edition dialogue box. Click on Detail. Error Processing (i. Clone or Delete buttons. not permitted without written authorization. A default standard configuration is set. Software Download Failure is not alarmed) • Profile “Primary alarms” with this profile the AIS. Path Trace Mismatch are not alarmed). Passing on and copying of this document.e. Communication Subsystem Failure. all alarms disabled). it is necessary to create it. . selecting one existing profile and then clicking on the Clone button. . Equipment alarms . or Clone button. Environmental . • The user can set profile 10001. For ASAP “No Alarms”. the AIS. Figure 12.e. Modify. Software Download Failure. . or Clone buttons. “Primary alarms”. use and communication of its contents alarm. . . SSF and RDI alarms are not alarmed. Battery Failure. SSF & RDI alarms are not alarmed) . You can select an ASAP. Software Download Failure is not alarmed) • Profile “All Alarms” (i. Environmental . This ASAP enables the emission of all: . This ASAP inhibits the emission of any potential All rights reserved. “No Remote Alarms” and “All Alarms” it is only possible to choose Detail. . Error Processing (i. Clone selection can be used to create new ASAP. the ASAP edition dialogue box is displayed. Each single alarm can be classified with a criterion selected by the operator.e. Battery Degraded.

To do this. select the TP or equipment in the related view and then select the Set Alarm Severities. ED 02 SC. Figure 13. the severity of each alarm is updated.. Then click on the option button: Service Affecting (not protected probable cause).). The max number of ASAP is six. "Warning". The alarm severity assignment profile dialogue box displays a list of probable causes and a list of alarm severity. For each All rights reserved.B. NOTE: it is necessary to choose one or more of these filters to have the list. The ASAP function only enables the modification of the severities assigned to the probable causes.B. press the OK button to confirm the settings and close the dialogue box or the Cancel push button to cancel the new settings and close the dialogue box. The Set ASAP dialog opens. When Clone an ASAP the created one is identified with next number (10002. not permitted without written authorization. select the probable cause whose severity level you wish to modify. The number of severities and the number of probable causes is fixed. it is mandatory to perform a re-synchronization of the alarms. "Minor". it does not allow the addition. To find a particular probable cause. ASAPs are already defined in the system with default values for the assigned severities. During this re-synchronization. Otherwise.2. 4. the severities are updated only when the NE emits the modified or new alarms. N. To take into account a profile modification. When selecting Details the assigned severity are only shown and it isn't possible to modify. use and communication of its contents alarm" probable cause corresponds to no alarm emitted for this probable cause. When you have finished configuring ASAP. A "Non- document. Set ASAP dialogue box. and then Non Service Affecting (protected probable cause) and then Service Independent (don't used. Passing on and copying of this the severity can be chosen from "Critical". enter its name in the Search entry box at the bottom.. removal or modification of these severities and causes.2 Set Alarm Severities To assign an alarm severity to a TP or equipment. The Probable cause family checks buttons allows filtering the probable causes that will appear in the Probable cause name list. option from the Configuration pull down menu. N. You can modify the severity associated with each probable cause.3. it is not operative). "Major".3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 48/386 . "Non-alarmed" or "Not used".

which are currently assigned to the ASAP. • Selected object and subordinates The new ASAP is applied to the selected object and those of this subordinates matching the criteria specified in "Choose Classes" and "Choose current ASAP". 4. Execution Monitoring Continuously shows the number of modified objects during the ASAP application process if one of the scopes "Network element" or "Selected object and subordinates" is chosen. its progress is shown in the Section "Execution Monitoring". the user specifies the objects (TP or equipment) the ASAP selected in the List of ASAPs (new ASAP) should be applied to: Choose Scope • Selected object only The new ASAP is only applied to the object currently selected in the view. Choose Class (es) Enabled if one the scopes "Network Element" or "Selected object and subordinates" is selected. N. Since this application process takes some time. Press Close to close the dialog and discard any changes. Due to system architecture. use and communication of its contents Since this application process takes some time. Press Ok to confirm the ASAP assignment and close the dialog.3 Set SdhNE Alarms Severities Selecting the Set SdhNE Alarms Severities option from the Configuration pull down menu only the alarms at Equipment level (FF. This is the default if an object is selected in the view. • All classes (es) • Specific class (es) Select one or more object classes the new ASAP shall be applied to. select the related OSTTP (OpS) or ESTTP (EIS) as main object. All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 49/386 . not permitted without written authorization. AU-4CTPs are no subordinates of MSTTPs. Passing on and copying of this document. This is the default if no object is selected in the view. Therefore. SHD and ABF) are managed. Choose current ASAP The new ASAP is only applied to objects. ED 02 SC. • Network element The new ASAP is applied to all objects of the NE matching criteria specified in "Choose Classes" and "Choose current ASAP".B. Within the "Apply to" section on the right side. if the AU-4 CTP should be included as subordinate.3. its progress is shown in the section "Execution Monitoring". BKF.

the labels of the alarm panel are grey out. Press Ok to confirm the ASAP assignment and close the dialog. a) To inhibit alarm notification.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 50/386 . Figure 14. Using the Detail button or double-clicking on a list item opens the ASAP Edition dialog which displays detailed information on this ASAP. Inhibit alarm notification From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the operation using the Ok or Cancel push buttons respectively. To inform the operator that alarms have been inhibited.3. Press Close the dialog and discard any changes. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. You can then select the Inhibit Notifs option from the Alarms pull down menu as shown in the following figure. Passing on and copying of this document. its ASAP is highlighted in the list. ED 02 SC. Figure 15. 4. Set SdhNE Alarms Severities If an object was selected in a view before opening this dialog.4 Allow/Inhibit Alarms Notifications The system provides the possibility to allow/inhibit the spontaneous incoming alarm notifications. select the Supervision pull down menu.

select the Supervision pull down menu.3. b) To allow alarm notification Select the Supervision pull down menu. Never use this operation during a correct behavior.5 Alarms re—synchronization The system provides the possibility to recover alarms present on the NE and to update the current problem list of the NE. This functionality has to be used only if there is any perturbation. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. After this operation CT and NE current alarms are consistent. ED 02 SC. Inhibiting the alarms notification means that they are not forwarded to the CT but alarms are still generated by the NE. N.B. N. You can then select the Allow Notifs option from the Alarms pull down menu as shown in the following figure. You can then select the Resynchronize option from the Alarms pull down menu as shown in the following figure. Passing on and copying of this document. Alarm re--synchronization From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the operation using the Ok or Cancel push buttons respectively. To re--synchronize the alarms. Figure 16. 4.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 51/386 . All rights reserved. Allow alarm notifications From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the operation using the Ok or Cancel push buttons respectively. Figure 17.B.

4. Alarm persistency Time Configuration ED 02 SC. Figure 18.3.6 Alarms persistency Configuration All rights reserved. Alarms persistency Configuration Menu option Figure 19. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 52/386 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.

4. The following dialogue box is opened. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. All rights reserved. Figure 20.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 53/386 .4 Restart NE The restart operation is a software reset and can be executed in normal traffic conditions. Restart NE confirmation Click on the Cancel push button to abort the restart NE. ED 02 SC. The restart operation in any case activates the Commit (active) version. Select the Restart NE option from the Supervision cascading menu.

The ACD manage the concurrence of access among several different managers (i.1 Set Manager list This option is referred to the Security management and allows the user to set the Manager list and the Access Control Domain of the NE. SY. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog. EML) that work on the NE. Select the Set Manager list option from the Supervision pull down menu. RM and EML). The user can set a not permitted without written authorization. assigning it to the NE.2 Set ACD level This option allows the user to select the level of the Access Control Domain. The Manager List contains the list of managers (i. use and communication of its contents • Manager list: each connected manager to the NE is highlighted in the list.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 54/386 . manager clicking on the denomination. 5 SECURITY MANAGEMENT In this chapter are inserted setting options referred to the Security management: 5. NPOS.e. The EML-USM administrator (SH or Craft Terminal) should set the Manager List only to remove a manager in case of emergency (i. ED 02 SC. Set Manager list 5. OK button is used to validate the selection. Passing on and copying of this document. RM. The dialog-box contains the following fields: All rights reserved. Several managers can be enabled contemporaneously.e. the Manager misses the NE connection). This only acts on the functions that can be used by different manager. The different domains could be assigned to different operators.e. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. having in charge the NE. Figure 21. • NE Domain field allow selecting the domain among that displayed in the list.

If it is changed. By the way. it is necessary to restart the EML-USM. Select the Set ACD level option from the Configuration pull down menu. the ACD is performed on all the NEs • No Check. The dialog-box contains the following fields: • Current ACD level Show the Access Control Domain level currently set. • The Access Control Domain check level Permit to set one of two level checks. this is an operation that should be performed only during the EML-USM installation phase: • NE level. Set ACD level ED 02 SC. Figure 22. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 55/386 . not permitted without written authorization. the ACD is not managed All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. OK button is used to validate the selection. use and communication of its contents The default value is NE level.

Figure 23. An external output point is independent from external input point. Opening the external points view After selecting this menu option the external points view is displayed into the current window instead of the current view.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 56/386 .1 Displaying external points Select the External Points option from the Views pull down menu. not permitted without written authorization. 6. -. 6 EXTERNAL INPUT AND OUTPUT POINTS MANAGEMENT This chapter describes how to display and set the input/output environmental alarm (housekeeping alarm). use and communication of its contents -. The operations that can be undertaken in this section are: All rights reserved. a flood.Configuring input and output external points. An external input point is an environmental alarm (also called housekeeping alarm).e.Expanding or reducing external points list. relay) connected to detector. Passing on and copying of this document.Displaying external points. -. It corresponds to an external event. which is monitored by the NE.. Number of relays on the NE is dedicated to check modification of the environment as for example a fire. An external output point is used to manage a NE contact (i. ED 02 SC..

Passing on and copying of this document. "On" when the alarm is raised. If the external point is active (On). • The external state: represents the alarm state. a little flag is represented near the status of the concerned point. display the alarm event and the board effected associated to the Output point (see further the paragraph External points configuration) ED 02 SC. External points view The external points view displays a list of all input and output points.All rights reserved. The following information is given for each external point: • The external point type: Input or Output. • The user label: a user-friendly label associated to the configurable external point (see further the paragraph External points configuration). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Only for the “Output” external point there is the following information: • The Output criteria: if configured.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 57/386 . Figure 24. else "Off".

The following dialogue box is then opened.1 Expanding or reducing external points list The external points view displays a complete list of the external points but it can also be restricted to the input or to the output points.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 58/386 . Configuring external points. All rights reserved. Can be set for output points (ON or OFF) • "Output criteria" associated to the External output point To configure an external point. To see either the input points. Figure 25. 6. And then select the Configuration option from the External Points pull down menu as shown in the following figure. displaying information about the selected external point (Input or Output). 6. the output points or all the external points. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 26. Expanding or reducing the external points list.2 External points configuration The configuration operations available on external points are: • "User labels" configuration • "External state". select the appropriate option from the External Points pull down menu as shown in the following figure.1. click on the concerned row. ED 02 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.

All rights reserved. External input point configuration dialogue box Figure 28. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 59/386 . External output point configuration dialogue box (MANUAL) ED 02 SC. Figure 27. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.

• External State: can be set to "on" (alarm) or "off" (non alarm) only if "Manual" option has been selected in the "Output Criteria" field. ED 02 SC. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box. When the configuration of the external point is completed. It is possible to define from CT the couple event/CPO#. in this case is also necessary to set the option "On" in the field "External State". External output point configuration dialogue box (FLEXIBLE) Opening the dialog the current state of the selected External Point is shown. • Output Criteria can be configured as: • Manual (forced).All rights reserved. 1) External Input Point Configuration • User Label: this field can be filled by the user with a Label that indicate the associated event that must be taken under check (for example presences of water of fire in the room where the Equipment is placed) • External State: this field is set to off and can't be changed by the operator • Probable Cause: the field is set to housekeeping and can't be changed by the operator 2) External Output Point Configuration • User Label: this field can be filled by the user with a Label that indicate the alarm detected or the action that must be executed if a specific event occur (for example a "Pump" activation when water is present in the room where the equipment is placed. RDI and LOF) and specifies the STM-N interface which the Output Criteria refers to by clicking on Choose button. • Flexible. The output contact is set in a fixed way. Figure 29. not depending on a particular event. click on the OK push button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box. where the event is chosen between a set of Output Criteria (LOS. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 60/386 . • For example the output contact could be used to "Manually" activate a pump drain water from the room where the equipment is placed. subsequently the TP search dialog box will be opened.

laser forced on etc. Access to the Alarm Surveillance to show the alarm condition is detailed in the following paragraph. their number and their severity level. 7. It is possible to show all the Alarms or filter the alarms report. you know the number of alarms and their severity relating to the equipment. are represented in all Equipment views (NE views. You can then select the following option from the Alarms pull down menu: • NE Alarms: all the NE alarms are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report which is activated • Object Alarms: only the alarms of the selected object are listed in the Alarm Surveillance Report • Subtrees Alarm: only the alarms of the selected object and of the relevant subtrees are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report • Equipment Alarms: only the alarms of the equipment management are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report • Transmission Alarms: only the alarms of the transmission management are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report • External Points Alarms: only the alarms of the input external point management are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report Figure 30. 7 DIAGNOSIS MANAGEMENT Alarms are always present on the operator's workspace. document. Than is presented the abnormal condition list (as result of operator's command such us loop. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this At the end the Event log access is introduced. at all times. which change color when the relevant alarm is active. An icon representation is used. Thus. Information about the significance of equipment alarms and status is given in the Maintenance section. This view shows first a synthesis of the NE alarms (Counter Summary) with the sum of all alarms. Select the Diagnosis pull down menu. All rights reserved. then a detailed list of alarms of the selected filter (Alarms Sublist). Alarm Surveillance Menu Selecting any of the previously seen options.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 61/386 . The different types of alarms.1 Alarms surveillance In this chapter is described the access to the Alarm Surveillance information of the NE. ED 02 SC. Board views and Port views). the Alarm surveillance report is displayed as for the example of the following figure.).

use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. For example the board in which the alarm is detected. Detailed description is given in the AS Operator's Handbook. The information supplied helps the operator. Passing on and copying of this document. typically during troubleshooting operation. the status of the alarm. (Maintenance section. where more details about alarms is given). Alarm Surveillance Detailed information for each alarm is supplied. the alarm type.All rights reserved. presented in next section. Figure 31.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 62/386 . ED 02 SC. the probable cause.

ED 02 SC. Select Diagnosis->Abnormal Condition List. Example of abnormal condition list The abnormal conditions are the following: • Loopback • ALS is disable and the laser is forced on or off • Protection units (in case of EPS. Figure 32. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Abnormal condition menu option Figure 33. Figure below is opened. All rights reserved. SNCP and MSP if supported) are in lockout or in forced status • Board (or sub-board) is placed in a not configured slot Select an abnormal condition and click on “OK” to open the relative dialog window. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 63/386 . 7.2 Abnormal Condition List The abnormal condition provides the synthesis of NE "not normal conditions" listing the events that contribute to abnormal condition.

Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. • The right side of the page displays the list of blocks representing the equipped boards. Select the Internal Link Monitor option of the Diagnosis menu. Figure 34. the diagnostic associated to the hardware failure. the second one concern the spare MATRIX. In detail. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. the two arrows represent the link status in RX and TX side: . ED 02 SC. each page contains the following functional blocks and graphical objects: • The tab of the page displays the user label of the MATRIX board. Internal Link Monitor displays a detailed localization of the link failure: a graphical representation of all NGI link status. As shown in Figure below. for the active and standby MATRIX is shown.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 64/386 . The presence of a failure on RX or TX side for the signal incoming/outgoing from/to the MATRIX is detected.3 Internal Link Monitor This function improves. Example of loopback dialog window management The other abnormal condition types will open the corresponding management window or will open the window to navigate towards the management window. 7. A red arrow indicates a "link failure" . The first page displays the link status for the main MATRIX. • The left side of the page displays the block representing the MATRIX board. • Two arrows are displayed between the MATRIX block and each board block. A green arrow indicates a "working link" • The Refresh button allows performing an explicit refresh of all the displayed information. at the user interface level. each block displays a string contained the user label of the associated board.

use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. • A red block represents the MATRIX if a link problem is detected in one of the NGI Tx from one of the possible "port" board. Figure 36. all boards that detect the link failure are represented by a red block in the page of the MATRIX main: • a” port" board in represented by a red block if a link problem is detected in the NGI Rx from the active MATRIX. the red arrows from every port cards to Stand-by Marix (if exist) won’t trigger “link failure” alarm. As in this condition. Figure 35. Passing on and copying of this document. Internal Link Monitor for stand-by Matrix when not synchronized ED 02 SC. the information detected by the stand-by matrix is “not reliability”. All rights reserved. In order to indicate all the possible roots of the "link failure". Internal Link Monitor Note: when either the system is not locked for at least 15 min or the system is in free-running / holdover state.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 65/386 .

Passing on and copying of this document. 7. select the Log Browsing option. ED 02 SC. Figure 37. • View Remote Inventory: display the remote inventory data. permitting to analyze all alarms stored in the NE.5 Remote Inventory This paragraph describes the access to the remote inventory of this NE. perform the following operations to have access to the Event Log file: . construction data etc. Remote Inventory option of the Equipment. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 66/386 . previously stored in the Craft Terminal by means the "upload remote inventory" performed in the "Supervision" menu. • The Configuration and Log Browsing ELM Windows open. A confirmation dialog box is opened. 7. • Refer to the "ELB Operator's Handbook" • Select the Event Log option (Log Id # 2) to access the Event Log file. In the Diagnosis pull-down menu. Select the Upload Remote Inventory option of the Supervision pull down menu.1 Upload remote Inventory This command stores the Remote Inventory data in the Craft Terminal. In the Remote Inventory are stored information of identification. The options used are: • Upload Remote Inventory: store the Remote Inventory data in the Craft Terminal.5. • The Configuration and Log Browsing ELM Windows open. All rights reserved. Log Browsing option in Network Element context view The Proposed option: • Select the Alarm Log option (Log Id # 1) to access the Event Log file.4 Log Browsing From the Network Element context views. permitting to analyze all events stored in the NE. • Refer to the "ELB Operator's Handbook" • Software Trace Log option is reserved to Alcatel personnel only. 7.

Figure 38. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Remote Inventory confirmation request Clicking on OK after a while an information dialog box is presented. All rights reserved. Figure 39. Remote Inventory completed ED 02 SC. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 67/386 .

TR-ISD-325 ED 02 SC. View Remote Inventory Data is displayed in specific fields: • Company It indicates the Company's (Alcatel's branch) which designs the unit. • Unit Type It indicates the units' acronym • Unit Part Number It indicates Alcatel or Factory product's Part No. The number indicated is that printed on the labels or on the units' front cover plate.2 View Remote Inventory This command displays the remote inventory previously stored in the Craft Terminal by means the Upload remote inventory. Passing on and copying of this document. of the unit's resident software • CLEI Code It indicates the CLEI code according to Belle core specs.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 68/386 . • Software Part Number It indicates the id. Refer to Alcatel for the abbreviation's meaning (four characters). Select the View Remote Inventory option of the Diagnosis pull down menu. All rights reserved. 7. Figure 40. The Remote inventory data appears.5. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.

• Manufacturing plant It indicates the Company's manufacturing plant id.. When only the year is displayed. Within the company. use and communication of its contents 01 production order data not permitted without written authorization. Refer to Alcatel for the abbreviation's meaning (four characters). the format must be "YY..3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 69/386 . Passing on and copying of this document. It is a two-digit code supplying the following information: 00 date of construction at the time of final testing All rights reserved. producing the unit.." ED 02 SC. • Serial Number It indicates the product's serial number as specified by the NR 130 Norm. 02 construction date of the unit lot 03 date products has been forwarded to customer 04 customer order date • Date (YYMMDD) The identification of the date depends on the indications stated in the previous field. • Date identifier It indicates the meaning of the date that follows.

level 1 intermediate systems know how to communicate only with IS in the same area. IS-IS protocol floods the network with link state information in order to build a complete consistent picture of the network topology. networks partitions consisting of the later type of node will be called static routing domains.1 Overview on Communication and Routing Domain The purpose of the communication and routing domain is to define configuration parameters concerning the communication protocols for the local NE. The synonymous list is used to ease partitioning in the future. compared with the number of internal links. Use of IS-IS routing protocol in a TMN facilitates installation and operation due to the "self learning" capabilities of these protocols and automatic network reconfiguration in case of failure. use and communication of its contents During the TMN design process. Passing on and copying of this document. it is only used to describe L1. RAP and MESA. • Level 2 intermediate systems must form a connected network. • Nodes not supporting these protocols. In the simplest case. all nodes within a level 1 sub domain share the same area address. this sub network should have only a few links to the outside world. because level 1 path cannot be utilized for level 2 communications.1 OSI Protocol on QB3/Qecc A brief description of basic concepts and terms involved in the communication and routing domain follows. In general it is allowed to have multiple synonymous area addresses within a level 1 sub domain even if the usage of this features should be checked with Alcatel engineers. obviously.1 Partitioning into Routing Sub domains In order to reduce the overhead associated with distributed adaptive routing. moreover the use of these standardized routing protocols guarantees interoperability in a MultiFinder environment. the OS and each other related NE in order to provide a global communication capabilities inside the network. ED 02 SC. 8. these nodes will be called static routers. there must be at least one level 2 intermediate system per level 1 sub domain.1. L2. called areas or level 1 sub domain. 8. otherwise they are not able to communicate with each other. • Each node which is connected to a foreign level 1 sub domain must become a level 2 intermediate system. It is not a network-planning example. Networks partitions consisting of the former type of node will be called adaptive routing domains.1. each domain can consist of a not permitted without written authorization. A level 1 sub domain should fulfill the following requirements: • A level 1 sub domain should form a connected sub network. a node which have to take routing decisions must became Intermediate Systems. • Each node must belong to exactly one level 1 sub domain. All rights reserved. all others can be made End Systems For the description of the following paragraphs use is made of Figure below. 8 COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING MANAGEMENT 8. these nodes will be called adaptive routers. a network is partitioned into domains. Moreover. There is a basic rule. it may be useful to divide a adaptive routing domain into smaller routing sub domains. which must be followed by two neighboring level 1 intermediate systems within a sub domain: there must be at least one area address in common between their two synonymous list.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 70/386 .1. collection of two types of nodes: • Nodes supporting a link state routing protocol IS-IS. This network will be called level 2 backbones.

2 Partitioning into separate Routing Domains In certain situations it may be necessary to partition a given network into separate routing domains. In such condition. The major benefits of this partitioning are reduction of memory. Figure 41. On the other hand. A Reachable Address Prefixes is handled in the same way as information about a foreign level 1 sub domain within the own domain. All rights reserved. Communication between separate routing domains must be achieved through the use of Reachable Address Prefixes (RAP). where no routing information is exchanged between these domains. processing and traffic overhead. 8. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents For example. which is split into two separate routing domains: not permitted without written authorization. the communication can be achieved through the use of Manual End System Adjacencies (MESA). consider network. The Reachable Address Prefixes indicates that any packet whose destination network address NSAP matches the prefix may be forwarded via the link with witch the prefix is associated. A prerequisite for the use of manual end system adjacencies is that the area addresses of the connected nodes must be the same. there can be some NEs not supporting IS-IS nor ES-IS protocol (static routing). It can only be associated with a link of a level 2 intermediate systems.1. because there is no exchange of routing information between the domains. A Reachable Address Prefixes represents static routing information. • Routing domain A resides in a level 1 sub domain with area address "a" • Routing domain B resides in a level 1 sub domain with area address "b" In order to enable the communication. within a given level 1 sub domain.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 71/386 . the Reachable Address Prefixes in routing domain A must contain the area address "b" and the Reachable Address Prefixes in routing domain B must contain the area address "a". as a consequence the nodes must belong to the same level 1 sub domain. Routing sub domain organization example ED 02 SC. Within a pure Alcatel network there is no need to use any kind of static routing. whereby this link crosses routing domain boundaries. Therefore normally RAP and MESA shall never be used.

and an OSI address.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 72/386 .e. OSI over IP technique is used to meet the target.1. Hence.3 IP over OSI tunneling for ATM/IP This feature is applicable to NEs equipped with ATM/IP boards. it encapsulates the SNMP messages of the TCP/IP protocol stack over the OSI stack.1. Once the packet gets the NE through a pure IP network. and to route the OSI packet as it does today using a pure OSI networking. No IP packets shall flow inside DCCs. Internet compatibility) in alternative to the full ISO/OSI communication protocols. ED 02 SC. OSI packets leaving the SH are encapsulated into IP packets within the SH system itself. This would permit to use an external DCN based on IP only. Hence. the GNE has to strip off the IP encapsulation. The implementation adopts the RFC1006 standard to put the OSI upper layers on top of IP networking. use and communication of its contents the external DCN. extracting the OSI packet. using CLNP. In this way the message reaches its final destination 8. not permitted without written authorization. Figure below depicts the protocol architecture. in the complete DCN network or at least in a consistent portion of it. containing the original OSI packet. LAPD. Passing on and copying of this document. the choice is software switchable at NE level. The application goal is to offer the TCP/IP transport (i. ECC protocols. because the GNE receives the IP packet containing the OSI packet.4 OSI over IP tunneling on QB3 This feature allows the Element Manager to reach the GNEs (and all the relevant NEs behind them) by using IP networking. and forwards only the OSI packet on DCCs. Hence. to communicate IP management messages through an OSI network. It permits to create a tunnel over OSI systems. The default OSI lower layers networking can be replaced by IP routing capability at the bottom of the QB3/QECC communication protocol suite. deletes the IP header. no OSI networking would be required on All rights reserved. packets leaving the SH are IP packets. 8. the internal networking of the SDH network (DCCs) is still based on OSI.

2 Communication and routing views To access select Comm/Routing option from the Configuration pull down menu as shown in the following figure. Figure 42. The Communication and Routing Views allows to perform the following operations: • Local Configuration: definition of the local NE addresses • OS Configuration: addressing of the main and spare OSs connected to the local NE • NTP Server Configuration: addressing of the main and spare NTP servers connected to the local NE • Interface Configuration Subdivided in: • LAPD Configuration: definition of the LAPD port parameters for each LAPD channel on the local NE • Ethernet Configuration: definition of configuration parameters needed to manage a local NE which provides a LAN Ethernet interface • OSI Routing Configuration Subdivided in: ƒ RAP Configuration: configuration of parameters necessary to the addressing of NE connected by Reachable Address Prefixes in a domain different from the one of the local NE. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. This information is stored in RAP table. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 02 SC. OSI over IP tunneling on QB3 8.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 73/386 .

Of Point-to Point Interfaces: definition of the Equipment Controller IP address ƒ ISA board IP address: definition of the ISA board IP address • Tunneling Configuration Subdivided in: All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 74/386 . use and communication of its contents ƒ OSI over IP: definition of destination IP address for IP for OSI over tunneling not permitted without written authorization. Comm/Routing options ED 02 SC. Figure 43. ƒ MESA Configuration: configuration of parameters necessary to the addressing of non IS-IS NE in the same domain as the one of local NE. This information are stored in MESA table. The options are described in next paragraphs. ƒ IP over OSI: definition of destination NSAP address and type of IP routing for IP over OSI tunneling All the previously cited operation can be entered choosing the relevant option of the menu. Passing on and copying of this document. • IP Configuration Subdivided in: ƒ IP Static Routing Configuration: definition of Host/Network destination address for IP static routing ƒ OSPF area Configuration: definition of Open Shortest Path First address ƒ IP Address Config. as shown in the figure.

The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the local address of the NE. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. ƒ a Transport Selector (T. use and communication of its contents ƒ a Section Selector (S. o The value of AFI 39 identifies the ISO-DCC format of 40 characters long. the last two fields. o Network Selector: provides the distinction among users of the network service and is 2 characters long (value is "1d"). the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. In the view. The presented value must not be modified. The presented value must not be modified. System Id and Network Selector.Sel) identifies a presentation entity at the location identified by the NSAP Address. The compilation of the two network addresses is optional and if they are inserted. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. The first field of the NSAP address. Selector) identifies a section entity at the location identified by the NSAP Address. Sel) identifies a transport entity at the location identified by the NSAP Address. Note that a level 2 intermediate systems performs functions of a level 1 too. the length of NSAP address is variable from 16 characters to 40 characters: o The value of AFI 49 identifies the local format of variable length (from 16 characters to 40 characters). The presented value must not be modified. Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialog-box and closes it. the NSAP is managed as simple strings of characters without any pre-formatting because of the variable format: o a first string of two characters that identifies the AFI field o a second string of variable length that identifies the remaining NSAP address • Synonymous Area Addresses section allows having multiple synonymous area addresses within a level 1 sub domain.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 75/386 . inserted in the NE or the operator might select it. End System is not operative. depending on the its value. of the mandatory address and of the synonymous addresses must be the same. In all cases the last two fields of the NSAP address are: o System Id: uniquely identifies a NE in an area and is 12 characters long. The AFI filed is 2 characters long (2 hexadecimal digits) and. determines the NSAP format. AFI. The following fields are present: • a Local Address section contains the following graphical object: ƒ a Presentation Selector (P. not permitted without written authorization. 8. Select the Comm/Routing option and then from the cascading menu the Local Configuration option.3 Local Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. • System Type section determines whether the local NE acts as a "intermediate system level 1" or as a "intermediate system level 2" or as a "End System". It might be the equipment MAC Ethernet address. ƒ a Network Service Access Point (NSAP) Address identifies a location in the network. ED 02 SC. level 2. o The value of AFI 47 identifies the GOSIP-V2 format of 40 characters long.

the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog. Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialog-box and closes it. All rights reserved. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. The following fields are present: • Main OS Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialog-box. Figure 44. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Local Configuration 8.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 76/386 . Select the Comm/Routing option and then from the cascading menu the OS Configuration option. ED 02 SC. Passing on and copying of this document.4 OS Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. • Spare OS Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialog-box. The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the addresses of the Main and Spare OSs connected to the local NE.

Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialog-box and closes it. used for time distribution in the network. Select the Comm/Routing option and then from the cascading menu the NTP Server Configuration option. Figure 45.5 NTP Server Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. • Main NTP Server Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialog-box. ED 02 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 77/386 . Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.All rights reserved. the same NSAP address of the OS must be assigned. The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the addresses of the Main and Spare NTP (Network Protocol synchronization Time) Servers connected to the local NE. the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. If the NTP server is coincident with the OS (same hardware). Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. The following fields are present: • Enabling NTP Protocol section allows enabling or disabling the NTP Protocol. OS Configuration 8. • Spare NTP Server Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialog-box.

ED 02 Figure 46. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT NTP Server Configuration 3AL 98325 ADAA 78/386 . SC.

8. ED 02 SC. for each LAPD Interfaces. It contains the following functional block and graphical objects: . • Create button that allows to create a new LAPD Interface.6 LAPD Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. use and communication of its contents • To delete the LAPD Interface selected in the LAPD Interface List. not permitted without written authorization. Named Create LAPD Interface. • This connection is a must to establish connection between two NE's: if one is configured with User role. the other one connected must be configured with Network role. • The Search button starts the search of the selected LAPD type. the table displays: . The LAPD role that contains one of the following value: • User • Network • Delete button that allows to delete the LAPD Interface selected in the LAPD table. The "LAPD Configuration" dialog opens. • A section LAPD Role that allows configuring the role (User or Network) of the LAPD Interface to be created. it is disabled when the maximum number of LAPD Interface has been configured. The user label of the TTP containing the configured LAPD Interface (MS/RS/E1A TTP). Passing on and copying of this document. This Create LAPD Interface dialog contains the following functional blocks and graphical objects: • A Choose button that allows the operator to select the superior TTP of the LAPD Interface to be created. the value "Ignore" will allow to display all the LAPD types. All rights reserved. this button starts a new dialog. • The LAPD Interface List that lists all the configured LAPD Interfaces. .a section named Search Criteria that allows the user to display only the LAPD's of the selected type in the LAPD Table. Select the Comm/Routing-> Interface Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the LAPD Configuration option. this button starts the TP Search dialog. the TP Search dialog will be configured in order to display in the right tree only the allowed TTP of the LAPD Interface. the section contains the following graphical objects: • The field Interface Type that allows to select the type of the LAPD's to be displayed in the LAPD Table.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 79/386 . • To create a new LAPD Interface . • Change Role button that allows too change the role (User or Network) of the LAPD Interface selected in the table. this buttons can be used to refresh the LAPD table too. A section named LAPD Interfaces List that allows the user: • To display the list of configured LAPD Interfaces using a graphical table. the field will manage both ADM and WDM DCC type. • To change the role of the LAPD Interface selected in the LAPD Interface List. . This section contains the following graphical objects: • The number of LAPD interface displayed in the LAPD Interface List.

3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 80/386 . Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 47. TP search dialog ED 02 SC. the message "No LAPD Interface" will be displayed near LAPD Interface counter (that it is at zero) All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The LAPD Interface List will be updated on reception of the Delete/Create/Change DCC CTP notification. Creation LAPD Interface \ Figure 48. If no LAPD Interface is configured in the equipment.

use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 49.All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. Confirmation to change LAPD Role ED 02 SC. Figure 50.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 81/386 . LAPD Configuration dialog Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.

7 DCC Cross Connection DCC Cross Connection function is used in the LAPD management information by non Alcatel NE carried by rs and ms DCC has to pass Alcatel Network for reaching a remote non Alcatel NE. use and communication of its contents In the following example a LAPD carried by RS will be cross connected with another LAPD. – Select the Configuration pull down menu. in all the Alcatel nodes it must be the MS to be terminated and the RS to be transparent – or vice versa) This paragraph list the complete procedure to realize the example of DCC cross connection moving among the various menus. After configure DCC Cross Connection. The "Cross Connection management for DCC" dialog opens Figure 51. All rights reserved.The choice of RS or MS DCC to be terminated must be consistent through-out the network (i.6 LAPD Configuration).B. been created in the LAPD Configuration (refer to 8. N.e. it allows the non Alcatel LAPD pass-through. Select the DCC Cross Connection option. the LAPD have not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 82/386 . The solution is to route transparently LAPD carried by rs and ms DCC. Select DCC Cross Connection ED 02 SC. 8.

the DCC cross–connection list in the Cross Connection Management for DCC dialog is not automatically updated.). The Search for DCC Cross Connection Input dialog offers the possibility to list TPs according to different filter criteria. or select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly.After creation of a DCC cross–connection. then select the filter criteria Class "RS or MS" and click on button Search.All rights reserved. click the Choose button and select the TP in the Search for DCC Cross Connection Input dialog (see Figure 54. Create a DCC Cross–Connection 1)Select or type in the Input TP.B. Figure 52. the Main Cross Connection for DCC view will be opened.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 83/386 . Use button Search in this dialog to update the list. –Click the Create icon. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. N. 2)Select or type in the Output TP as described in Step 1). The matching TPs are listed in the right listbox. ED 02 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. Select the input TPs in the list and confirm with Ok. To enter the TP. Cross Connection Management for DCC dialog The following description lists the steps the user has to take to create a cross–connection using The “Cross Connection management for DCC". First select the rack in the left list box.

use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 02 Figure 53.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA Main Cross Connection for DCC dialog 84/386 . All rights reserved. SC. Passing on and copying of this document.

ED 02 Figure 54. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA Search for DCC Cross Connection Input view 85/386 . SC.

All rights reserved. Complete searching for input and output TP Figure 56.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 86/386 . Figure 55. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Update DCC Cross Connection list by clicking Search icon ED 02 SC.

which provide a LAN Ethernet interface. o L1 Default Metric is a not modifiable field. not permitted without written authorization. Note that the flag shall be set to No if some other nodes (NEs or OSs) of the same area of the relevant NE are connected to the Ethernet. Passing on and copying of this document. IP Mask and the Routing IP Protocol used. The following fields and data are present: • Ethernet Interface field allows defining or removing a Local Area Network Port for the access to the Data Communication Network.8 Ethernet Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. If “OSPF” or “Both” options of Routing IP Protocol field are selected. • MAC Address section allows displaying the address of the Network Element in the Ethernet LAN. also the “Associated OSPF Area” must be set. thus avoiding transmitting L1 packets.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 87/386 . Priority field can be set (default value for Ethernet is 64) • IP Section allows to define the “node” IP Address. it All rights reserved. • OSI Section: o L2 only Parameter field indicates if the port shall be used for level 2 traffic only. Priority field can be set (default value for Ethernet is 64) o L2 Default Metric is a not modifiable field. Select the Comm/Routing-> Interfaces Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the Ethernet Configuration option. Apply button performs a configuration change of the data. The dialog-box opens (figure below) and allows defining the parameters needed to manage a NE. ED 02 SC. use and communication of its contents is a read-only field. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. 8.

Figure 57. Passing on and copying of this document. SC.L2 only parameter 88/386 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT Ethernet Configuration 3AL 98325 ADAA Ethernet Configuration -. All rights reserved. ED 02 Figure 58.

the LAN port will be used. each page contains the following data: • Physical Interface button o If the element is empty. o If the element isn't empty. Each element of the RAP table allows to link a LAPD port or a LAN port of the local NE to a separate domain. the separate domain is selected by the address Prefixes. RAP Configuration ED 02 SC. the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. • Area Address Prefix section allows the user to address the separate domain. 8. Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete RAP table and close the view. displays the "none" value and allows to select a LAPD ports or a LAN port which will be used to reach the addressed area. displays the selected port and allows to change it. The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the Reachable Address Prefix table. New button is used to insert a new page. it allows the user to select the pages of the notebook using the pointing device. If the addressed element is the OS. Figure 59. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. use and communication of its contents displays the element counter. Passing on and copying of this document. not permitted without written authorization. the field is managed as a simple string of 12 digits. In detail.9 Reachable Address Prefixes Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. The Area Address Prefix represents a NSAP address without the fields System Id and Network Selector. each page represents a particular element of the RAP table and the respective pointing device All rights reserved. Select the Comm/Routing -> OSI Routing Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the RAP Configuration option. Delete button is used to delete the selected page.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 89/386 . • MAC Address section allows addressing the element of a domain to be reached the Ethernet LAN. The view simulates a real notebook.

displays the "none" value and allows selecting a LAPD ports or a LAN port. The view simulates a real notebook.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 90/386 . Figure 60. use and communication of its contents displays the element counter. the field is managed as a simple string of 12 digits. each page contains the following data: • Physical Interface button o If the element is empty. Each element of the MESA table allows linking a LAPD port or a LAN port of the local NE to a End System element. which will be used to reach the End System element. o If the element isn't empty. 8. it allows the user to select the pages of the notebook using the pointing device. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. MESA Configuration ED 02 SC. • MAC Address section allows addressing the element in the Ethernet LAN. the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. not permitted without written authorization. The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the Manual ES Adjacencies table. displays the selected port and allows changing it. each page represents a particular element of the MESA table and the respective pointing device All rights reserved. If the addressed element is the OS. the LAN port will be used. In detail. • System Id section represents the System Id of the ES element. Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete MESA table and close the view. Select the Comm/Routing -> OSI Routing Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the MESA Configuration option. New button is used to insert a new page. Passing on and copying of this document. the ES element must be in the same area as the one of the local NE.10 Manual ES Adjacencies table Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu.

12 IP Static Routing Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. NOTE: this addressing must be carried out at both end nodes of the tunnel. it is to be done for every SDH–NE of the network. the IP Static Routing Configuration option. The dialog box opens and allows configuring the parameters for IP Static Routing Configuration. [3] Default Gateway IP Address: allows defining the address of the next hop gateway [4] CLNP (Connection Less Network Protocol): allows to use a pre-define IP over OSI tunnel to towards a gateway. Points from [3] to [5] are alternative ED 02 SC. N. NOTE: this addressing must be carried out at both end nodes of the tunnel. 8. Passing on and copying of this document. This should be the first addressing operation • not permitted without written authorization.B. 8. by means of the options: – “IP Static Routing Configuration” if using static routing – “OSPF Area Configuration” if using the automatic OSPF routing • “ISA Board IP Address” it defines the IP address for the ATM or IP boards (ISA). if equipped with ATM/IP boards. The following fields and data are present: [1] Destination Host IP Address: allows defining the IP address necessary to reach a specific Host [2] Destination Network: it is alternative to Destination Host IP Address.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 91/386 . • “OSI over IP Tunneling” it defines the IP address of the destination node to be reached (for instance the IP router where the TMN is connected).11 IP Configuration The options listed in the menu Configuration –> Comm/Routing –> IP Configuration and also in Configuration –> Comm/Routing –> Tunneling Configuration is relevant to the configuration of messages communications for the management of ATM or IP boards (ISA) inside the equipment and in the network. so that they can see each other. Select the Comm/Routing -> IP Configuration and then from the cascading menu. so that they can see each other. allows defining the IP Address IP Mask to reach a network. i.1 IP routing configuration for ATM/IP boards management In order to manage the ATM/IP boards inserted into the equipment. when an OSI management message passes through an IP network. It is to be defined on a a Gateway Network Element (GNE) equipped with the QB3 interface. where the QB3 is connected to a LAN/IP network. use and communication of its contents Equipment–Controller (EC). it is to be defined for every ISA board hosted by the equipment. NOTE: if the ISA boards are in EPS 1+1 configuration.11. Routing configuration. 8. when the ATM/IP management message passes through an SDH/OSI network.e. the following operations are to be done: • “IP Address Configuration of Point–to–Point Interface” defines the IP address for the All rights reserved. [5] IP Point-to-Point Interface Id: allows to use point to point interfaces made available by EC. they must have the same address) • “IP over OSI Tunneling” it defines the OSI address (NSAP) of the destination node to be reached (for instance the GNE connected to the TMN).

IP Static Routing Configuration 8. Apply button is used to perform a configure change of the data contained in the column of the table and close the view. The following fields and data are present: • OSPF Area IP Address • OSPF Area Range Mask Both fields gives a synthetically information that includes all the addresses (specific a NE and to a Network) in an Area. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. the OSPF Area Table Configuration option. the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 92/386 . All rights reserved. ED 02 SC. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. Select the Comm/Routing -> IP Configuration and then from the cascading menu.13 OSPF Area Table Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. Passing on and copying of this document. New button is used to insert a new page. Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete RAP table and close the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. Figure 61. The dialog-box opens and allows configure the parameters for OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) Area Table Configuration.

14 IP Address Configuration of Point-to-Point Interfaces Select the Configuration pull down menu. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. OK button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialog-box and closes it. New button is used to insert a new page. IP Address Configuration of Point-to-Point Interfaces ED 02 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 93/386 . All rights reserved. Figure 62. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. OSPF Area Table Configuration 8. Figure 63. Select the Comm/Routing->IP Configuration and then from the cascading menu. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. the IP Address Configuration of Point-to-Point Interfaces option. Passing on and copying of this document. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. The dialog-box opens and allows setting the Equipment Controller IP address used to communicate with the ISA board.

ISA Board IP Address ED 02 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 94/386 .15 ISA board IP Address Select the Configuration pull down menu. All rights reserved. Figure 64. Select the Comm/Routing->IP Configuration and then from the cascading menu. 8. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. The dialog-box opens and allows setting the IP Address of the ISA Board that communicate with the Equipment Controller (EC). the ISA Board IP Address option. OK button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialog-box and closes it.

3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 95/386 . Delete button is used to delete the selected page. the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.17 IP over OSI Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing->Tunneling Configuration and then from the cascading menu. New button is used to insert a new page. The dialog-box opens (Figure below) and allows configuring the Remote Destination IP Address of the Equipment Controller. OSI over IP Tunneling configuration Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete table and close the view. All rights reserved. The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the Destination NAPS Address and the IP Routing Type. Select the Coo/Routing->Tunneling Configuration and then from the cascading menu. 8. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. depending on the its value. In all cases the last two fields of the NSAP address are: ED 02 SC. The following fields are present: • Destination NAPS Address: A Network Service Access Point (NSAP) Address identifies a location in the network. Figure 65. Passing on and copying of this document. The AFI field is 2 characters long (2 hexadecimal digits) and. the OSI over IP option. the IP over OSI option. • The value of AFI 47 identifies the GOSIP-V2 format of 40 characters long. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The first field of the NSAP address. AFI determines the NSAP format. 8.16 OSI over IP Select the Configuration pull down menu. the length of NSAP address is variable from 16 characters to 40 characters: • The value of AFI 39 identifies the ISO-DCC format of 40 characters long.

• System Id: uniquely identifies a NE in an area and is 12 characters long. It might be the equipment MAC Ethernet address. New button is used to insert a new page Delete button is used to delete the selected page Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. also the "Associated OSPF Area" must be set. • Network Selector: provides the distinction among users of the network service and is 2 characters long (value is "1d") In the view. the NSAP is managed as simple strings of characters without any pre-formatting because of the variable format: • A first string of two characters that identifies the AFI field • A second string of variable length that identifies the remaining NSAP address • IP Routing: allows to choose the type of IP routing supported as follows. inserted in the NE or the operator might select it. use and communication of its contents • RIP (Routing Information Protocol) not permitted without written authorization. IP over OS ED 02 SC. • OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 96/386 . • Both • None If "OSPF" or "Both" options are selected. Figure 66. Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete table and close the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. level 2. Passing on and copying of this document.

In the Rack level view. not permitted without written authorization.B.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 97/386 . selecting in the Rack level view the Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu.1 Introduction and navigation This section deals mainly with the setting and changing of the boards present on the Equipment and undertaking board protection operations. the board level of the Equipment view can be reached. • It is possible to go back to the upper level of representation by pressing the <ESC> key on the keyboard. The first level of the "Equipment Overview" representation will be displayed directly into the current window The Equipment Overview enables a fast navigation through all levels of the equipment hierarchy. The port view displays the inner TPs. by double clicking on a board body. Using the menu options. • Further. by double clicking on a port body contained in the board. the Equipment level view is presented. ED 02 SC. It is also possible to: • Go back to the previous view. named SRFAN The Fans Subrack presence is managed with the Set option as for the boards of the 1662SMC Subrack Further. further. the Rack level view is presented. select the Equipment option from the View pull down menu. by selecting the Backward option from the views menu • Go to the next view. selecting in the Rack level view the Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu. The NE hierarchy is organized in the following way: subrack > board > port > TP. 9 Equipment Management 9. the port level of the Equipment view can be reached. Selecting in the first level of the Equipment view (subrack level) The Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu. use and communication of its contents is done from higher to lower levels. two subrack are presented: • At the top the 1662SMC Subrack. Double clicking on the objects performs the navigation through different levels of the NE hierarchy: • The first level shows the subrack level of the Equipment view. Passing on and copying of this document. • Further. named SR62C • At the bottom the Fans Subrack. the Equipment level view is presented. Navigation All rights reserved. by selecting the Forward option from the view menu N.

Equipment Overview -. Equipment Overview -. Figure 67.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 98/386 . Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved.Subracks levelz Figure 68.Rack level (without Fans subrack) ED 02 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.

NE level ED 02 SC.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 99/386 .Rack level (with Fans subrack) Figure 70. Passing on and copying of this document. Equipment Overview. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Equipment Overview . Figure 69.

Figure 71. Equipment menu Equipment setting operation are defined according the following sequences: . All the options offered by equipment menu are described in the next paragraphs. the Set option is available only after selecting an empty slot or an Out-of-service board. • Select the Set option of the Equipment pull down menu. Passing on and copying of this document. or on an existing Out of Service board in order to change it. a ) Setting or changing a board/subrack A new board/subrack may be created in either an empty slot or it may replace an existing Out of Service board/subrack (without the lock symbol). Set and change the boards present on the Equipment is the main function. Remove a board • "Set out of service" the board • "Remove" the board 9. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Alarms indications are present at every NE level. In the Subrack view it is possible use the options offered by the Equipment menu clicking on it in the menu bar. • The following example of dialogue box containing a list of the different types of boards/subrack is displayed.2 Set and change or remove board/subrack The boards can be set.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 100/386 . Change of board type • "Set out of service" the board • Configure the board using the option "Set" . Configuration of a new board • Configure the board using the option "Set" . In fact. • Click on the empty slot in which a board/subrack has to be added. changed or removed using the menu options of the Equipment view. Details about these alarms indication are given in the Maintenance section. The contour becomes highlighted to show that operations can be done on it. ED 02 SC. All rights reserved. Board administrative state that decides on the "in/out of service" of the board is also described.

The list of boards/subrack displayed during a "Set Board" operation is restricted to those.B. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 72.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 101/386 .All rights reserved. which the equipment may accept in the selected slot. ED 02 SC. For details on the board/subrack identified by acronyms and NE physical composition please refers to the Technical Handbook. Therefore the list will vary depending on which slot has been selected. The list of different boards relative to an NE slot (example) N. Passing on and copying of this document.

Passing on and copying of this • document. b) Removing a board/subrack All rights reserved. the Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes the dialogue box. N. ED 02 SC. Note: In case of 4xANY Modules it is also necessary to choose the type of user supported as shown in Figure 64. The outline of the slot becomes highlighted to show that operation can be done on it. by clicking on the corresponding item in the list. Click on the OK push button to validate the choice. The name of the board is highlighted. It is possible remove a board only if it is not involved in any type of cross connection (OH bytes included) or Performance monitoring. • Select the Remove option of the Equipment pull down menu. operations can be done on the slot. • Choose the board/subrack/access card type required. This indicates that the board is selected and that not permitted without written authorization. The outline of the slot becomes highlighted. • Select the Modify option of the Equipment pull down menu. • The board/subrack representation appears on the NE view in the slot when the board change is effective. • If the slot you are working on is already empty no name appears under the slot.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 102/386 .B. This procedure can be done to replace an existing optical module with another of different type without previously remove it. • From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the "Remove" operation. • Click on the optical module to replace. c) Modify a board N. The Help push button opens a Help view giving information about the context. use and communication of its contents Click on the board/subrack to remove.B. A lock representation appears over the boards ("in-service") • In the Create/Modify dialogue box.

Figure 74. The list of different types of optical module (example1) ED 02 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 73. Modify the module • A dialog box containing a list of different types of optical module is displayed.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 103/386 .All rights reserved.

SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA The list of different types of optical module (example2) 104/386 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 02 Figure 75. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document.

Passing on and copying of this document. 02 SC. All rights reserved. ED Table 1. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA DWDM SFP module wavelength corresponding channel number 105/386 .

Chose the optical module type required by clicking on the corresponding item in the list. • Click on OK push button to validate the choice. Passing on and copying of this document.E. Figure below. when slot 6 is equipped with SYNTH4. view in the slot when the board change is effective.3 Connect Fan to CONGI board This command enable the Fan Subrack alarms management from CONGI in slot 10 or slot 12 according to the option selected in the Equipment menu. Connect FAN to CONGI ED 02 SC. the following procedures need be done: • When inserting the SYNTH4 in subrack slot 6. Figure 76. • On Craft Terminal in the Subrack level view select the SYNTH4 unit in slot 6 All rights reserved. A padlock representation appears over the board. • The board representation appears on the N. use and communication of its contents • Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the SYNTH4 acronym from the list not permitted without written authorization. on Craft terminal a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm will be present. the name of the module is highlighted. • Verify that the RUTM alarm disappear 9. Shows an example Select the CONGI board To enable this function select the Connect Fan to CONGI#1 option (or as alternative Connect Fan to CONGI#20) of the Equipment menu if the supervision Fan Subrack cable is connected to CONGI unit inserted in slot 1. Note: Slot 6 is auto set SYNTH16. then click on ok.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 106/386 .

1 Setting a board in service • In the Subrack NE view. substituted by the symbol over the boards. It is possible to disable this function by selecting the relevant CONGI board and then choosing the Remove Fan connection from CONGI#1 option of the Equipment menu. a lock representation appears over the boards which are in "in service" state. click on the board in order to select it.4 Board administrative state The operator decides to set a board in service or out of service.B. 9. Figure 77. ED 02 SC. • Select the Set out of service option of the Equipment pull down menu.4. Passing on and copying of this document. if the NE allows it. • Select the Set in service option of the Equipment pull down menu. A lock representation disappears. A lock representation appears over the boards. 9.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 107/386 .4.2 Setting a board out of service • In the Subrack NE view. Remove FAN connection from CONGI 9. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. N.. click on the board in order to select it. In the equipment view. Select the Ok push button in the confirmation window that appears. All rights reserved.

ED 02 SC. Consulting a board’s administrative state 9. Passing on and copying of this document. • Select the Software description option of the Equipment pull down menu. This indicates that the board is selected and that operations can be done on the slot. All rights reserved.5 Software description This function allows the operator to visualize information about the software(s) which is (are) present in the selected board.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 108/386 .3 Consulting a Board's Administrative state The board's administrative ("in service" or "out of service") state is indicated on the board view as shown in the following figure. Click on the Close push button to close the dialogue box. 9. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Opened dialogue box contains as many folder sheets as there is software in the selected board. • Click on a board in which the software is wanted to know (COMPACT ADM unit). The outline of the slot becomes highlighted.4. Figure 78.

Appear. Passing on and copying of this document. • Select the Remote Inventory option of the Equipment pull down menu. Figure 79. 9. Software Description dialogue box. Remote Inventory menu For the Board level a dialog similar to Figure below. ED 02 SC. Two options are available: • Subrack level: prints or write on a file the remote inventory data of the subrack.6 Remote Inventory This command displays the remote inventory data present in the Subrack and Boards. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. • Board level: show the remote inventory data of the selected board Figure 80.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 109/386 .All rights reserved.

Select Printer N. Remote Inventory dialogue box The remote inventory data of the Subrack level can be printed on the default printer or to a file in postscript or ASCII format. Select Output Format for file ED 02 SC. If no printer is installed. Figure 82.B. there is no error message displayed to indicate this. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 110/386 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 81. Figure 83.

– transmitter output power. All rights reserved. They are useful for indicating the performance of the optical interface and for monitoring a possible degrade of the component. Such information reports the characteristic parameters of the interface. the relevant parameters to be reported are: – temperature. 128). 9. provides an extended set of information called Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM). Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 84. Click the SFP module. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.5V). with dBm as unit measure ED 02 SC. – receiver input power. select the DDM option Then the Digital Diagnostic Monitoring dialog box is opened. select the Digital Diagnostic Monitoring option from the Equipment pull down menu. with 1/256 Celsius degrees as unit measure with range (-128. with microAmpere as unit measure. they are not static but dynamically updated and directly pursued by the hardware component itself. – transmitter laser bias current. 6. – power supply voltage.7 Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) In the new families of pluggable optical interfaces SFP. with dBm as unit measure.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 111/386 . with 100microVolt as unit measure with range (0.

Figure 86. Passing on and copying of this document. Equipment Overview -.Subrack level ED 02 SC. Figure 85.8 Show supporting equipment Click on Show Supporting Equipment menu option of the Equipment menu to navigate to the equipment that supports the selected board.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 112/386 . Digital Diagnostic Monitoring dialog box 9.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.

use and communication of its contents Alarms and Status indications referred to the board level are present at the bottom of the view. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 113/386 . The "Board view" is reached selecting the Equipment option in the View pull down menu. In the Maintenance section details on this indication are given.1 Introduction The Board View permits to show the physical port available in a specific board and to access the Port view. All rights reserved. EPS condition if supported and other indications typical of each unit. 10 BOARD VIEW 10. presenting the ports. Equipment view: select the SDH port on a board ED 02 SC. An example of "board view" with the presented port is in Figure 88. in the example (Administrative State and Board Alarms/Status). This information are "In/Out of service" of the board (Administrative State) and board alarms and status like "missing" (RUM) or "mismatch" (RUTM). In case of board with multi access SDH another view permits to select the SDH port. Figure 87. as indicated not permitted without written authorization. then double clicking on the selected board to show the relevant Board view.

use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Example of a Port identification and alarm synthesis The following information is available: • Type of port (name) • State of port (alarm status synthesis) • Symbol of the port The operator is provided with a representation of the port alarm synthesis on each port.All rights reserved. ED 02 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 88. The messages displayed at the top view provide port denomination. The port identification is usually internal to the rectangular board (see Figure below.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 114/386 . The messages displayed at the bottom provide information about Board alarms. Example of a Board View A port type is described with a board rectangular view and port identification. one example of optical port) (SDH) (ATM or IP) (PDH) (GBit ETHERNET) Figure 89.

All rights reserved. 10. it is also possible open the corresponding port view.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 115/386 . Figure 90. use and communication of its contents • Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper subrack level.2 Board View Menu Selecting the "Board" option in the menu bar the complete pull down Board menu is presented: • Port Access: Access the "Port" view. • ISA Port Configuration: It allows configuring the TPs for the ATM connections.1 Port Access Click on Port Access menu option of the Board menu to access the "Port View" Navigation to the Port view permits to show a detailed alarm presentation of the port and to set the relevant configurations. Passing on and copying of this document. A message under the mouse facility provides the name and the port type or the alarms name. • Change Physical Interface: Change the SPI or PPI object into PPI or SPI (and vice versa) on the bi- mode port (140Mbit/s / STM-1 switchable).2. A message appears in the message area in the bottom left corner of the view. By double clicking on a board view. Note: this option is accessible after the selection of a port contained in the view. ED 02 SC. Board menu options These options are described in next paragraphs. 10. not permitted without written authorization.

All rights reserved. After “Port Access” selection (example) 10.2. it changes the SPI or PPI object into PPI or SPI Select the Symbol of the port in the "Board view". Change Physical Interface The following dialog box is opened: Figure 93. Figure 92. Click on Change Physical Interface menu option of the Board menu.2 Change Physical Interface This command allows to change the type of physical interface in a bi-mode port (140 Mbit/s / 155 Mbit/s switchable port) i.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 116/386 . Figure 91. Passing on and copying of this document.e. Change Physical Interface dialog box ED 02 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.

All rights reserved.3 Show supporting equipment Click on Show Supporting Equipment menu option of the Board menu to navigate to the subrack that supports the selected port view. Subrack level ED 02 SC. 10.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 117/386 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Click on the OK push button to change the physical interface. Passing on and copying of this document.2. Figure 94. Click on the Cancel push button to abort the change of the physical interface.

ATM/IP/ETH). VC12XV. VCn TTP • HOA port: VC4 TTP. VC4 TTP. TU3. RS TTP. The "Port view" is also reached selecting the Transmission option in the View pull down menu. Then the Add TP option of the Transmission menu permits to select and confirm a TP. 11 PORT VIEW 11. TUG3. VC3 TTP and VC12 TTP • Fast ETHERNET port: MAU. not permitted without written authorization. HOA. VC4XV. All rights reserved. VC3XV. modification and configuration of each port.e. as described in chapter "Show supporting equipment" Double clicking on the selected board the relevant Board view is available presenting the ports. TUG2. Trail Monitor (only with enabled POM) • PDH port: PPI TTP. PDH. TU12. The Port View permits to set and show the transmission resources (i. VC3 TTP and VC12 TTP ED 02 SC. PTC. Passing on and copying of this document. VC3 TTP and VC12 TTP • Gigabit ETHERNET port: MAU. VC4 TTP. VC3 TTP. VC12 TTP. The ATM/IP/ETH TPs are not automatically created when the board is inserted in the subrack but must be created as explained in chapter ATM/IP/ETH Configuration From the Port view It is possible to Navigate to Transmission view. s31 TTP and E1 TTP • PR_EA port: VC4 TTP. use and communication of its contents In these views are presented only the TP specific of the port. select the TP and on the Transmission menu select the Navigate to a port view option. Trail Monitoring (only with enabled POM) • ATM port: VC4C TTP. En CTP. and the available menu permits to configure the port. The HOA port view can only be reached from the Transmission view. The Port View can be accessed from the Equipment or Transmission Views. The port types contain the following TP: • SDH port: Electrical or Optical SPI TTP. TP) referred to the specific Port. The "Port view" is reached selecting the Equipment option in the View pull down menu then double clicking on the presented rack/subrack to present the subrack view. AU4 CTP. The menu differs according the port type (SDH.1 Introduction This section describes the operations necessary for the consultation. the Termination Point. By double clicking on a board view. VC4 TTP.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 118/386 . prot TTP (MSP TTP). the corresponding port view is opened. (many setting options listed in the port menu are common with the "Transmission" view). it permits to check the detailed alarms presented by each TP of the Port. selecting a VC or TU TP. PTC. On the transmission view. which appears.

A message under the mouse facility provides the name and the port type. • TP Role The icon boxes represent the function: Adaptation. • Performance State ED 02 SC. The color of the boxes changes according to the alarm severity. the messages displayed at the top view in the form of message boxes provide more information concerning the type and the alarms of the port.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Termination or Compound Adaptation and Termination. • Cross-connected state If the condition of the resource is cross-connected. On the other hand the messages displayed at the bottom provide information about MSP protection and ALS state (if they are supported). Example of a SDH Port View On the port view. an icon with a x appears beneath the box. 11. A message appears in the message area in the bottom left corner of the view. Figure 95.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 119/386 . Passing on and copying of this document.2 Port View: elements on the TP The symbols of the TPs have the following meaning: • Alarm Icon Area The icon boxes represent alarms.

• Loop state If the condition of the resource is under loop. Figure 97. Termination TP box. an icon with a L appears beneath the box • Selected state An orange frame around the box identifies the TP selection. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. so port menu refers to the selected TP.783 Adaptation TP box. Figure 96. G. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. If the condition of the resource is under performance monitoring.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 120/386 . ED 02 SC. an icon with a P appears beneath the box.

It is described in this chapter. Not available for PDH port. The menu differs according the port type (SDH. Figure 98. • Monitoring Operations: Set parameters for POM/SUT and TC (Tandem Connection) TPs. and is introduced in the following: • TP configuration: Set parameters for the Signal Label and Path Trace overhead on Synchronous TP's. Examples of port menu options (SDH. ED 02 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 121/386 . • Physical Media: Manage the physical setting of the TP of the port. not permitted without written authorization. • TP Threshold Configuration: Set B2 excessive BER and Signal Degraded parameter • TP Frame Configuration: Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G. It is described in the following paragraph. HOA and ATM). for commissioning or maintenance purposes • MSP Manage the Multiplex Section Protection of the NE.4 Set Retiming The Retiming feature applies to the outgoing 2 Mbit/s and its purpose is absorb the jitter / wander that is transferred to the PDH signal when SDH pointer justification occur. 11. PDH. Not applicable to HOA port. use and communication of its contents • AU4 Concatenation: Only for SDH ports views. Passing on and copying of this document. • Performance: See and Show Performance Monitoring parameters and data.3 Port View Menu Selecting the "Port" option in the menu bar the complete pull down Port menu is presented.704 or ISDN-PRA management. The feature is set individually per port.703/G. SUT. opening all TP's • Navigate to Monitor view: permit to show an overview about the monitoring operation (POM. Select a 2Mbit/s port and zoom in to open the port view. • Navigate to Transmission view: permit to show a complete overview about the signal flow. • Set Retiming: Enable/disable the retiming feature on the outgoing 2 Mbit/s signal. TC) all TP's. • Loopback: Manage the loopback commands. • Show supporting board: Navigate to the upper board level. • Cross Connection: Manage the connection of the paths. All rights reserved. PDH and ATM port) 11.

use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 99. When the Retiming feature is disabling.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 122/386 . Set Retiming enable (before) As result of this operation the state information color become green and the label "Retiming State Enable" is written. All rights reserved. Set Retiming enable (after) ED 02 SC. Figure 100. the color of the state information at the bottom of the window is brown and the label "Retiming State Disable" is written. Select the Set Retiming->Enable option from the Port menu.

Zoom in to open the board and then the port view menu. Click on the Cancel key to exit and come back to the previous window.5 AU4 Concatenation Select a STM-16 or STM-4 optical interface to configure as AU4 concatenation structure. Figure 101. ED 02 SC. not permitted without written authorization. Select the supported concatenation Number =4 (selection 64 is not operative) to visualize the available All rights reserved. AU4#9. (In this example a STM-16 view is shown) The STM-16 stream appears divided into different groups: not all AU4s can be chosen as first AU4 but only AU4#1 AU4#5. AU4 concatenate/deconcatenate commands The Concatenate button will be enabled and the Deconcatenate button will be disabled when is selected a non concatenated AU4. Passing on and copying of this document. 11. use and communication of its contents group/groups then select the group to concatenate and click on the Concatenate push button. Therefore for concatenated action of for AU4s in one AU4c these AU4 streams are deleted and substituted by the new AU4c component.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 123/386 . vice versa when is selected a concatenated AU4. Select the AU4 Concatenation option from the Port menu to open Figure below. AU4#13 for AU4c.

Click on the Deconcatenate push button to apply the command or on Cancel to exit. Shows an STM4 interface with four AU4 concatenated in one AU4c. Figure 103. Example of a concatenated AU4 transmission view The port view represented in Figure up. Cross-Connection states and Performance Monitoring information as standard AU4 streams.All rights reserved. Figure 102. Example of a concatenated AU4c ED 02 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. The AU4c appears as a single icon that has the same size of the actual AU4 blocks. The AU4c streams support the Alarm synthesis.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 124/386 . To deconcatenate an AU4c select again the "AU4 Concatenation" option in the Port View menu and then select the AU4c to deconcatenate. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.

Not operative . Not operative . . These options are described in next paragraphs except the previously referenced.ALS Management .Show Optical Configuration All rights reserved. .NT X21 Configuration. .Ethernet Mapping Protocol. Figure 104.Single Fiber Configuration not permitted without written authorization. . The Physical Media options are also accessible from the Transmission menu.HDSL Configuration. Physical media menu (SDH port example) ED 02 SC. Not operative • ETHERNET port: .6 Physical Media option menu The Port -> Physical Media options permit to set physical configuration of each TP of the port.NT G703/704 Configuration.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 125/386 .Ms Configuration • PDH port: . It opens a menu that differs according the port type: • SDH port: .Ethernet Port Configuration .Remote Laser Management. 11. use and communication of its contents . Not operative .LAPD Configuration .ATM/IP/ETH Configuration .Control Path Activation. Passing on and copying of this . Not operative . .Line Length Configuration.Tx Quality Configuration document.ALS Management.

1 Automatic Laser Shutdown Configuration The aim of this paragraph is to describe the optical port hence the laser sources. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. select the ALS Enabled option of the ALS Function: option button. When the laser is forced to ON or OFF. it is restarted or stopped and the Automatic Laser Shutdown is disabled. All rights reserved. 1) Force laser ON. The automatic laser shutdown function can only be configured from the optical ports of the equipment. The following actions are available a) Allow Automatic Laser Shutdown.6. Figure 105. The Automatic Laser Shutdown State dialogue box opens. Select the Physical media option and then from the cascading menu the ALS Management option. To allow the automatic laser shutdown functionality.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 126/386 . b) Forcing the Laser to start or stop. Select the SPI block in the port view and then select the Port pull down menu. if it was not already so. For safety reasons it may be necessary to shutdown the laser to enable the fixing of the communication link. 11. Passing on and copying of this document. Automatic Laser Shutdown Management The dialogue box enables the ALS Management and the Restart parameters. ED 02 SC. Automatic laser shutdown (ALS) is useful in case of a loss of communication between two NEs due to optical fiber breakdown.

Selecting only the Close button allows you to cancel the choices made.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 127/386 . the manual restart permits to permits to perform a laser restart for single time period. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The restart time period for this equipment is fixed to 70 secs. select the Laser Forced ON option of the ALS Function then click on Apply and then or close push button to close the dialogue. From this window it is only possible to create the ALS function (all ALS commands are grey) All rights reserved. The same procedure is applicable for the ALS Manual restart: while the ALS auto Restart is disabled. in periodic mode. select the Enabled (Disabled) option of the ALS Auto Restart. ED 02 SC. Figure 106. select the Apply button to confirm the setting and close the dialogue box. To carry out a laser forced OFF. e) Wait to restart time The Wait To Restart Time: field indicating the delay period in seconds. f) ALS Manual restart When the ALS Manual Restart is Enabling it is possible to enter two different commands: Manual or Test Restart. 2) Force laser OFF. The laser will be ON for 2 secs and OFF for 70 secs. are: ALS states: Inactive = No ALS has been activated (Off) or the laser has been Forced ON/OFF. select the Laser Forced OFF option of the ALS Function then click on Apply and then or close push button to close the dialogue c) Delete: this option deactivates the ALS function. The manual command immediately activates a single laser restart: this command overrides the wait to restart time. Note that the ALS procedure is activated ( if enable ) only when the fiber has been interrupted and the ALS state has not to be confused with the laser state. occurring before an automatic laser restart is launched (following an automatic shutdown). Passing on and copying of this document. Automatic Laser Shutdown Management (after ALS Function delete) d) Enabling or Disabling Automatic / Manual Laser Restart. When all the different parameters have been configured. To carry out a laser forced ON. displayed by the functional state message area of the optical port. To enable (disable) an automatic laser restart following an automatic laser shutdown (periodic restart). returning to the state. The test restart is similar to the manual restart but the laser remains "ON" for a longer time in order to make a measurement of the received optical power. ALS states (see example of).

Figure 108. Passing on and copying of this document. Active = The ALS has been activated (On).B.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 128/386 . Undefined = The ALS is not present (not created). You cannot write in the entry boxes. Visualizing a port optical parameters The laser ports are identified by three major characteristics: • STM Level: describes the input/output optical interface types: STM1/STM4 • The wavelength of the laser source: the units are nanometers (nm = 10-9 m). Forced on = ALS forced on by operator command. Laser state: On = all OK or ALS not present (not created). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Firstly select an optical board and the SPI block. In test = the laser restart has been automatically activated. ALS and Laser current state (example) 11. then click on Show Optical Configuration option from the Physical media pull down menu to visualize the parameters of the selected optical port. All rights reserved. ED 02 SC. Off = Laser off (when ALS is created).2 Show Optical Configuration This command permits to get detailed information on the optical characteristics of the port that is visualized. Figure 107. Shows an example of the parameters of the selected interface. Forced off = ALS forced off by operator command. N.6. This dialogue box can only be read.

3 Single Fibber Configuration The single fiber configuration can be realized with passive optical couplers. Figure 109. use and communication of its contents congruency between the received and the expected labels. received section. 11. Example of Figure below. • Transmitted Section: ⎯ Transmitted Media Byte . For this purpose and in general to avoid a low Tx/Rx decoupling also when the optical line is interrupted. the Rx part in the remote receive side checks the document. Bidirectional Transmission on a single fiber Select the Physical media option and then from the cascading menu the SDH Single Fiber Configuration option. Shows that are accepted the label "1" from Tx1 to Rx2 while is accepted label "2" from Tx2 to Rx1. the following fields have to be considered: • Allow Single Fiber . an alarm (AIS and RDI) will be generated. Passing on and copying of this identification label has been assigned to the local Tx side.Media Dependent byte of Regeneration Section or .6. If a signal label mismatch is recognized on the not permitted without written authorization. • The use of the port: describes whether the laser port is used for interoffice transmissions on long distances (Long Haul) 40 km) or for interoffice transmissions on short distances (Short Haul ] 15 km). The Colored Interface Parameters section is not applicable in the current release To close the dialogue box click on the Cancel push button.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 129/386 . an All rights reserved.assigned label to Tx (0-14) ⎯ Transmitted Media Type . The optical coupler must not loop the Tx signal onto the local Rx. In the figure that opens.select the transmit mode on the single fiber (enable or disable).S1 byte of Multiplex Section (the part not used for the SSM) • Received Section: ⎯ Received label ⎯ Expected label (0-14) ED 02 SC.overhead byte used for the communication: .

3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 130/386 . Single Fiber Configuration View 11. Select the MSP TP. Figure 111. Ms Forced AIS is not supported in the current release. Click on Ms Configuration menu option of the Port menu. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. This dialog allows selecting between SDH or SONET networks.4 Ms Configuration The Ms Configuration menu allows the SS bit provisioning for Multiplex Section Object (MSTTP) in SONET/SDH network interworking. Ms Configuration ED 02 SC. After the selection click on Apply and then on Close to close the dialog. Passing on and copying of this document.6. Figure 110.

11.6.5 Line Length Configuration
To manage the Line Length configuration click on Line Length Configuration menu option of the Physical
Media menu.
This dialog allows configuring the line length for a PDH PPI TP of a 45 Mbit/s port.
The OK button validates the configuration and closes the dialog box.
The Cancel button removes the dialog
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 112. PDH Line Length Configuration View

11.6.6 Ethernet Port Configuration
To set Ethernet port parameters, select the Ethernet Port Configuration option of the Port -> Physical
Media menu as shown in Figure below.

Figure 113. Ethernet Port Configuration options

Subsequently Figure below. Will be opened.

ED 02 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98325 ADAA 131/386

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 114. Ethernet Port Configuration Dialog
For the Fast Ethernet (10/100 Mbit/s) port it is possible to choose between two “Configuration Type”:
1. Auto navigation “: enable allows to configure the "Rate" to be negotiated (10 or 100 Mb/s). The
"Directionality" (Full Duplex) and the "Flow Control" (Activated) are always enabled and can't be
changed.
2. "Manual”: allows forcing the "Rate" at 10 or 100 Mb/s.
The "Directionality" is always Full Duplex.
Moreover It is possible to Restart the “Auto Negotiation” by depressing the relevant button; if parameters
has been changed before pressing the Restart button, a question dialog is displayed to advice that the user
has changed data but not applied them.

Figure 115. Information dialog
In read only mode there are indication if the Auto negotiation on remote side is activated (Remote Auto
Negotiation) and what parameters are allowed on remote (Remote Allowed Parameters).
In both cases is possible to check the “Auto negotiation Current State” with the possible massage:
– Completed OK
– Completed KO
– Configuring
– Deactivated
– Parallel Defect Fail
– Other
At the bottom of the port view are displayed the following indications:

ED 02 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98325 ADAA 132/386

– The “Interface Type”:
• S1000 Base SX (only for Gigabit Ethernet board)
• S1000 Base LX (only for Gigabit Ethernet board)
• S1000CX (only for Gigabit Ethernet board)
• S100BaseTX
• S100BaseFX
• Unknown
• S10BaseT
– The “Bit Rate” (only for fast Ethernet board):
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

• 10 Mb/s
not permitted without written authorization.

• 100 Mb/s

Figure 116. Gigabit Ethernet port view (example)

ED 02 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98325 ADAA 133/386

11.6.7 Ethernet Mapping Protocol
Select a VC TP.
Click on Port Ethernet Mapping Protocol option of the Port–> Physical Media menu. Figure below opens.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 117. Ethernet Mapping Protocol (EXAMPLE)
This dialog aims to show the actual Ethernet mapping protocol used and allowing the user to change it. The
options available are the following:
– FAST ETHERNET boards:
⎯ GFP null extension Header with FCS
⎯ GFP null extension Header without FCS
⎯ GFP for packed concatenation extended
– GIGABIT ETHERNET boards:
⎯ GFP null extension Header with FCS

⎯ GFP null extension Header without FCS

11.6.8 Control Path Activation
This dialog allows modifying the state of the Ethernet and DVB-ASI port virtualTPs.
Select a TP in the Ethernet port view window.
Click on Control Path Activation option of the Port–> Physical Media menu.
A new window will be opened; a similar window is display when a new concatenated VCX is created in the
“ISA/IP/ETH configuration” window.
This dialog aims to show the activation state of the virtualTPs present in the Ethernet Port View and to
change the number of virtualTPs active.
The Active state is reached by choosing the number of “Virtual TPs to be active” and click on the Apply
button.

ED 02 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98325 ADAA 134/386

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 118. Control Path Activation (example on Fast Ethernet board)
On the contrary to change in Idle the Active state of a TP decrease the “Virtual TPs to be active” field and
then and click on the Apply button.
Click on the Refresh button to update the changes.
Click on Close button to close the Control Path Activation window.
Example figure below is the Active state.

Figure 119. Control Path Activation: Range Path mode

ED 02 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98325 ADAA 135/386

11.6.9 LCAS Configuration

11.6.9.1 LCAS Introduction
The LCAS protocol is supported since R. 2.1 in ISA Ethernet Switch board at STM-1 ES1-8FE/8FX and since
R.2.2 in ISA Ethernet switch at STM-4. Board and ISA Gigabit Ethernet (GETH-MB).

11.6.9.1.1 LCAS parameters
The indication that LCAS protocol can be activated on a virtual concatenation group is represented by the
instantiation of the conditonal package lcasControlPackage on vc-nXVritualTTP (n=12, 3, 4). The following
conditonal packages have to be instantiated on vcnXVirtualTTP (n=12, 3, 4) for supporting lcas specific
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

parameter:
not permitted without written authorization.

• MaxDifferentialDelayPackage for reporting the max supported (by the board) differential delay and
for configuring the maximum tolerated differential delay; the default value has been chosen at
48(ms).
• RsAckTimeoutPkg for configuring the timeout of re-sequence acknowledge; the default value has
been chosen at 512 (ms).
Note: the conditional packages tsdContributionPkg, holdOffTimeAndWTRPackage have not to be
instantiated.

ED 02 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98325 ADAA 136/386

11.6.9.1.2 LCAS operations
The action control Path Activation allows to activate (ADD) more than one member (vc-nVirtualTTP) with a
single manager request.
Similarly is possible to de-activate (REMOVE) more than one member (vc-nVirtualTTP) with a single
manager request.
The capability of de-activating (REMOVE) specific members ( vc-nVirtualTTP) is supported, this
functionality is not working if LCAS protocol is not activated, but it’s possible to de-activate from last active
member. Symmetrically the capability of activating (ADD) specific members ( vc-nVirtualTTP) is supported.
The activation of LCAS protocol on a virtual concatenation group already working is possible, but it’s a traffic-
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

affecting operation since it requires to de-activate all members before LCAS enabling.
document, use and communication of its contents

The symmetrical operation (even if not meaningful) of de-activing the LCAS protocol on a virtual
not permitted without written authorization.

concatantion group already working is possible, such operation impacts the traffic bandwidth transmission
since it requires of remaining with only the vc-VirtualTTP with ID=1 as active member.

11.6.9.1.3 LCAS protocol information
For monitoring the LCAS protocol the LCAS Monitor action is provided; some parameters returned by the
action are defined as Optional, the following ones are expected to be anyway returned: the number of
working members in tx, the number of working members in Rx, the member identifier reference for MST
(TBC), the received rs-ack bit (TBC), the transmitted rs -ack bit (TBC), the differential delay of each member.

11.6.9.1.4 Alarm indications
If the LCAS protocol is activated the following alarm indications can be raised:
At virtual path level (vc –n Virtual TTP, n=12, 3, 4)
• Member Not De-skew-able (probable Cause excessive Differential Delay): when the virtual path has
a differential delay which can’t be compensated; if LCAS is not activated this alarm corresponds to
Loss Of Alignment alarm raised at virtual group level (virtual PTC). at virtual concatenation group
level (vc-nX Virtual TTP, n=12, 3, 4):
• Loss Of Partial (probable Cause bandwidth Reduced): when one of active members vc-n Virtual TTP)
is affected by SSF, TIM, UNEQ, L OM or Excessive Differential Delay.
• Loss Of Total (probable Cause server Signal Failure): when all the active members are affected by
SSF,TIM, UNEQ, LOM or Excessive Differential Delay.
• LCAS protocol failure (probable Cause communications Protocol Error) raised when inconsistent
sequence numbering of the members is received or the CRC error control fails on LCAS multiframed
packet.

11.6.9.2 LCAS Configuration
This dialog allows modifying the state of the Ethernet port.
Select a TP in the Ethernet port view window.
Click on LCAS Configuration option of the Port–> Physical Media menu.
A new window will be opened; a similar window is display when a new concatenated VCX is created in the
“ISA Port configuration” window.
This dialog aim is LCAS (Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme) protocol management of the TPs present in the
Ethernet Port View.

The button "Apply" will set the configuration if the LCAS protocol is enabled.

ED 02 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98325 ADAA 137/386

In the following picture we can note that are managed all the attributes described before and the two actions
are managed by means of the two buttons (Enable/Disable and Monitoring...).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 120. LCAS Configuration

The "Monitoring..." button start the "LCAS protocol monitoring" view like the figure below.

Figure 121. LCAS Monitoring

ED 02 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98325 ADAA 138/386

The LCAS Monitoring window is divided in two section, the first reports information concerning the Virtual
Concatenation Group Monitoring Parameters, the second reports the Channels Monitoring Parameters.
Virtual Concatenation Group Monitoring Parameters fields description:
– Active Channel Number: display the number of Vcs active on Source and Sink read on Node A.
– Acknowledge Bit (Re–Sequence Acknowledge) Source and Sink: when a renumbering of the
sequence numbers of the members sending in CTRL field NORM, DNU, EOS, or when a change of
the number of these members is detected at the Sk, a notification to the So per VCG has to be
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

performed by toggling (i.e. change from ’0’ to ’1’ or from ’1’ to ’0’ ) the RS–Ack bit.
not permitted without written authorization.

– MST Channel Ref.: indicates wich channel of the VCG is the reference one for MST information;
MST information report the member status from Sk to So with two states: OK or FAIL (1 status bit
per member).OK = 0, FAIL = 1.
– VCG Master: indicates wich channel is the reference channel for the Differential Delay calculation.
Channels Monitoring Parameters fields description:
– The first column contains the channel identifier inside the VCG (called Sequence Number) .
– Tx CTRL Packet: Message sent (ADD, DNU, IDLE, NORM, EOS, FIXED), relative to a traffic flow
from Node A to Node B; it provides the status of the individual member of the group as reported in
the following:
• Fixed: this is an indication that this end uses Fixed bandwidth (non–LCAS mode)
• Add: this member is about to be Added to the group
• Norm: Normal transmission
• Eos: End of Sequence indication and Normal transmission
• Idle: this member is not part of the group or about to be removed
• Dnu: Do Not Use (the payload) the Sk side reported FAIL status
• Unknow
– Rx Channel State: MST indication (OK/FAIL) relative to a traffic flow Node B to Node A;
– Rx CTRL Packet: Message received (ADD, DNU, IDLE, NORM, EOS, FIXED), relative to a traffic
flow from Node B to Node A; it provides the status of the individual member of the group as reported
in the following:
• Fixed: this is an indication that this end uses Fixed bandwidth (non–LCAS mode)
• Add: this member is about to be Added to the group
• Norm: Normal transmission
• Eos: End of Sequence indication and Normal transmission
• Idle: this member is not part of the group or about to be removed
• Dnu: Do Not Use (the payload) the Sk side reported FAIL status
• Unknow

ED 02 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98325 ADAA 139/386

starting at 0. – RxVC: contains the sequence number assigned to a specific member from Node B to Node A. Each member of the same VCG is assigned a unique sequence number.7 TP Frame Mode Configuration not permitted without written authorization. starting at 0. Each member of the same VCG is assigned a unique sequence number.703/G. relative to a traffic from Node B to Node A .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 140/386 . All rights reserved. – Differential Delay: it is calculated respect to the Virtual Concatenation group Master channel.703/G. Passing on and copying of this document. PRA management The PRA functionality performs termination bi–directional function for Time Slot 0 on framed with CRC–4 2 Mbit/s signal. Sa5. G. Sa6 and A) of the Time Slot 0.704 frame management. The Refresh button refreshes the values displayed. TP Frame Mode Configuration can also be accessed from the “Transmission” and “Synchronization” view menu. Moreover. This menu item enables the configuration of the most important transmission parameters concerning the Primary Rate Access (PRA) and G. use and communication of its contents 11. In detail.703 interface) 2Mbit/s signal. This TP Frame Mode Configuration option is available for: – P12–CTP Select the desired P12–CTP and then the Port –>TP Frame Mode Configuration option. The following dialog appears: ED 02 SC.704 interface) or not framed (G. it generates substitution frames in case of detection of LOS on the signal coming from a Terminal Equipment. defect detection and consequent actions. – Tx Channel State: MST indication (OK/FAIL) relative to a traffic flow Node A to Node B.704 management This functionality allows to activate the adaptation function to process a framed (G. it extracts in sink direction and writes in source direction particular bits (E. The PRA functionality has been extended in order to manage proprietary handling of the bits of Time Slot 0 (Framed with leased line PRA option) in terms of state. – TxVC: contains the sequence number assigned to a specific member from Node A to Node B.

defect detection and consequent action. the user can choose one of the following value: • ”Not Framed” (G. • “Framed without PRA” (G.704): the behavior according to ETS 300–233 is applied in the handling of bits of Time Slot 0 in terms of state. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. the possible value is: • “Disabled” that disables the CRC–4 • “Forced” that configures CRC–4 with consequent actions • “Automatic” that triggers the CRC–4 algorithms in order to allow interworking of pieces of equipment with and without a CRC4 capability. Figure 122. • ”Framed with PRA”: PRA function is activated • ”Framed with leased line PRA”: a proprietary leased line behavior is applied.703 interface): the PRA function cannot be activated. – “CRC4 Status“ that defines the monitoring capabilities applied to the signal with a CRC multiframe: •“Operation”: allows configuring the CRC–4 processing modalities. • Monitoring Enabling”: enable or disable the CRC–4 error counting • ”Remote Indication”: read–only field that indicates if status of CRC–4 error counting functionality of far–end NE is enabled or disabled. Passing on and copying of this document. TP Frame Mode Configuration The windows contains the following graphical objects: – ”Framed Signal Mode” that allows to configure the attribute framed Signal Mode. – “Loss of Synch Consequent Action” allows to perform the consequent action on the transmitted ED 02 SC.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 141/386 .

ED 02 SC. the consequent action is performed only if PRA or leased line application ha been configured on the associated P12–CTP. 2M/s signal with retiming when the CRU is in Holdover or Free running mode. All rights reserved. – “Frame Status” is a read–only field that reports an indication of the received signal: • ”No indication” • “The 2Mb/s signal is multi–frame” Press Ok to apply the parameters or Cancel to close the dialog.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 142/386 . Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.

8 Show Supporting Board Select a TP. Figure 123.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 143/386 . (Example) opens. Board View Example ED 02 SC. Figure below. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. Click on Show Supporting Board menu option of the Port menu to navigate to the board that supports the selected port view. 11.

All rights reserved.9 Navigate to Transmission View Select a TP. Click on Navigate to Transmission View menu option of the Port menu to navigate to the corresponding Transmission View that is related to the selected TP.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 144/386 . Figure 124. Passing on and copying of this document. “Navigate to Transmission view” selection ED 02 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 11. Navigation to the Transmission view permits to show a complete overview about the signal flow as for the example of the following figure.

ED 02 Figure 125. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA After “Navigate to Transmission view” selection 145/386 . SC. All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.

use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Navigation to the Monitoring view permits to show a complete overview about the Monitoring Operations (POM.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 146/386 . Passing on and copying of this document. View of Monitoring Operations (example) ED 02 SC. SUT. TC) as for the example of the following figure. SUT. Figure 126. All rights reserved. In figure below is shown an example of Monitoring View of a TP with POM and TCM both before and after matrix. TC) Click on Navigate to Monitoring View menu option of the Port menu to navigate to the corresponding Monitoring View that is related to the selected TP.10 Navigate to Monitoring View Select a TP where are configured some Monitoring Operations (POM. 11.

Port Mode Overview Dialog You can select the port type you want to see. Figure 127. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. And set the port mode. Figure below.11 Port Mode Overview Click on Port mode option of the Configuration–> Port mode menu.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 147/386 . then you can click the port you want to set at the found port list table. 11. Port Mode Menu Option Figure 128. As below. and click the search button to list them. ED 02 SC. All rights reserved. Port Mode Overview Dialog allows a centralized mechanism for: – System wide search for Port Mode settings – Change of Port Mode setting – Change of Port Mode default. Passing on and copying of this document.

Auto). Passing on and copying of this In physical section layers. CWDM port only) and to the Port Mode set (Ignore. Using it in Port View or Transmission View enable the “single port” functionality and the search capability is greyed out. The subset is defined according to the filtering capabilities on Port Type (all ports. Mon. Using it at Configuration menu the “multi port” working mode is enabled with full support for search and filtering. All rights reserved. The AUTO mode is like the NMON mode with one exception: if the LOS defect clears. Figure 129. Change of Port Mode System Default can be done in the related frame Current system default is visualized in the combo box current value. System wide search capability is offered in order to show port mode value representation for all ports in a NE or in a port subset. The user can choose the new Port Mode (in the Define Port Mode Values field) and can start the change on the selected ports (Set Mode). This allows for alarm-free installation without the burden of using a management system to change the monitor mode. The state can be MON if the termination function is part of a trail and provides service and NMON if the termination function is not part of a trail or is part of a trail which is in the process of set-up. use and communication of its contents AUTO. the termination point mode is called the port mode. breakdown or re-arrangement. This is controlled via their termination point mode or port mode parameter. and NMON (the last is not supported). SDH port Only.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 148/386 . Multiple selection is allowed. the port mode is automatically changed to MON. It has three modes: MON. Port Mode Overview dialog is available both at Configuration menu and Port View menu and Transmission View as well. set the selected port mode ED 02 SC. PDH port Only. document. Change of Port Mode setting can be done on the selected ports in the matrix gadget. not permitted without written authorization. The termination point mode can be either “monitored” (MON) or “not monitored” (NMON). Ethernet port only. To prevent alarms from being raised and failures being reported during trail provisioning actions. trail termination functions have the ability to enable and disable fault cause declaration.

Everything must be done so that the communications can continue smoothly and so that the equipment failure remains transparent to the users. Passing on and copying of this document. a protected service will be switched back to its protected element when it has recovered from its failure. • Protection wait to restore time: Used when revertive mode is active. handling millions of communications. The actions that can be undertaken are of the following type: • Consult and modify an Equipment Protection Scheme (EPS). Switching the board supporting the protected service when this board fails to a protecting board capable of supporting the same service performs the protection. The functional state message area of the boards involved in an equipment protection scheme displays EPS protection states. A protected element must be fault free during this fixed period of time before a protected service is switched back to it. perform the following operations: The "Port view" is reached selecting the Equipment option in the View pull down menu to present the subrack view. ED 02 SC. This priority can be 1. Board duplication remains the easiest way to ensure equipment protection in a system. 12 Equipment Protection management (EPS) 12.. without the possibility of replacing equipment in a real time way.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 149/386 . In non-revertive mode. 12. the switch to the protecting element is maintained even after a recovery from failure. An equipment protection scheme is composed of the following parameters. • Manual Switch EPS. • Protection priority: A priority can be assigned to protected units in 1+n protection schemes. • Select the Equipment option in the View pull down menu. Protection management deals with this aspect of the EML-USM. or n. consequent to equipment failure. 1+1 group type means that one protecting unit protects a working element. In Board view.1 Introduction It is unthinkable to launch a telecommunications system. the protection wait to restore time prevents several protection switches due to an intermittent failure. the board whose content is represented is considered as implicitly selected.2 Management: consulting and modifying EPS In order to consult EPS. This protection is realized according to a protection All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents scheme. • Configuration type: revertive or non revertive In revertive mode. . which can be configured: • Group type: 1+1 or 1+n The group type specifies if one or more unreliable resources for protection can be assigned to one or more reliable resources. 1 being the highest priority.. 1+n group type means that only one protecting unit protects n working elements. 2. not permitted without written authorization.

The current release of this NE fixes the following protection: • N+1 (with N ≤ 3) "P63E1 or P63E1N" protection .Board of slot SPARE (protecting): P4ES1N.Board of slot MAIN (protected): P4ES1N. The available protection schemes are coherent with the NE type and release.Board of slot MAIN (protected): P4E3/T3. slots 7 to 14. Then select the Management. . from slot 7 to 14. EPS Management dialogue box The EPS Management dialogue box shows the current NE protection schemes in the left side.. Figure 131.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 150/386 . from slot 7 to 14. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. .. All rights reserved.Board of slot SPARE (protecting): P3E3/T3. slot 7 to 14. Consulting EPS The following dialogue box is opened. from slot 7 to 14.Board of slot MAIN (protected): P63E1 or P63E1N. from slot 7 to 14. The list gives for each protecting board the protected board(s). . • N+1 (with N≤7) "P3E3/T3" protection ... Figure 130. Passing on and copying of this document. • N+1 (with N ≤7) "P4ES1N" protection . ED 02 SC.Board of slot SPARE (protecting): P63E1 or P63E1N. • Select the EPS pull down menu.. The right side of the dialogue box allows modifying the EPS configuration.

no restriction for position of main and spare ATM MATRIX is present. This does not apply to the local STM-1 interface so the traffic on it is lost. The spare card position can be assigned in a flexible way. In this configuration the ISA PR_EA and all indirect interfaces connected to it are protected against module failure. The HPROT card has to be plugged at the left side of the access card group . no restrictions for position of main and spare ISA PR_EA are present. The DVB-ASI boards can be protected in 1+1 equipment protection scheme. depending on the equipment configuration. The spare board position can be assigned in a flexible way. For P3E3/T3 and P4ES1N more than one protection group N+1 revertive can be created. It does not apply to the local interface so the traffic on it is lost. A maximum of four protection group 1+1 not revertive can be created. the main/spare ASI-MB boards have to be adjacent . The main/spare boards have to be adjacent . In this configuration the ATM MATRIX and all indirect interfaces connected to it are protected against ATM module failure.B. The access card corresponding to the protecting board must be an HPROT card . N. The spare card position can be assigned in a flexible way. Passing on and copying of this document. In this configuration the ISA ES-16 and all indirect interfaces connected to it are protected against module failure. A maximum of two protection group 1+1 not revertive can be created. no restriction for position of main and spare ATM MATRIX is present. the protecting board has to be plugged in the left side of the protected board. In this configuration the ATM MATRIX and all indirect interfaces connected to it are protected against ATM module failure. the access card corresponding to the protecting board must be an ISA-HPROT card . the ISA-HPROT card has to be plugged in the left side of the ASI-ABNC access card . • 1+1 ISA PR_EA (PREA4ETH. the only constraint are the following: . This does not apply to the local interface so the traffic on it is lost. A maximum of two protection group 1+1 not revertive can be created. • 1+1 "ATM MATRIX 4x4" protection The ATM MATRIX board can be protected in 1+1 equipment protection scheme. The spare card position can be assigned in a flexible way. use and communication of its contents • 1+1 “DVB-ASI” pretection not permitted without written authorization. PREA1GBE)” protection The ISA PR_EA boards can be protected in 1+1 equipment protection scheme. A maximum of two protection group 1+1 not revertive can be created. ED 02 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 151/386 . The only constraint is the following: . The spare card position can be assigned in a flexible way. The protecting/protected group of ports have to be of the same type All rights reserved. A maximum of four protection groups 1+1 not revertive can be created. The protecting board has to be plugged at the left side of the protected group of boards . • 1+1 ISA ES-16 protection The ISA ES-16 boards can be protected in 1+1 equipment protection scheme. • 1+1 "ATM MATRIX 8x8" protection The ATM MATRIX board can be protected in 1+1 equipment protection scheme. In the configuration the DVB-ASI and all indirect interfaces connected to it are protected against module failure.

use and communication of its contents N. Press this button to displays a window to choose a board in the "Board Selection" list. the rule is same. don't click on item in the left list. In current release SYNTH16 can not protecte SYNTH4. A choose button is provided to display the list of boards which could be added as protected. In this way the right part is displayed empty and the Choose Protecting button is sensitive. and vice versa.Board of slot 15. For SYNTH4. the OK button close the dialog box and create the scheme (the new list is update re-opening the EPS Management dialogue box). For each type of failure on the MATRIX main board (CRU. It means when SYNTH16 is inserted in slot6. the spare boards The COMPACT ADM protection is automatically presented in the left side of the dialog box when the SPARE COMPACT ADM is created in the Set option of the Equipment menu.B. Passing on and copying of this document.Board of slot 6. slot 15 must be equipped with SYNTH16 but not SYNTH4. This operation fills the protecting element text field and the protected list with the board user name. It is not created with the EPS menu described in this chapter. Shelf Controller) a switch is performed to not permitted without written authorization. The spare card position can be assigned in a flexible way. c) Scheme deletion ED 02 SC. The upper part provides a message field with the name of the Protecting board and a choose button to display the list of boards available. When the right part of window is correctly filled. always using the same "Board Selection" list dialogue box presented. The board are listed opening the NE>rack>subrack levels. b) Scheme creation To create a new protection scheme. The only constraint are the following: • the access card corresponding to the protecting board must be an ISA PROT card • the ISA PROT card has to be plugged at the left side of the GETH-AGR or ETH-AFX access card • the main/spare ISA ES-16 boards have to be adjacent. • the protecting board has to be plugged at the left side of the protected boards • 1+1 "COMPACT ADM" protection . user selects an item on the left list. The Cancel push button cancels the creation and closes the dialog box. COMPACT ADM spare (protecting) All rights reserved. COMPACT ADM main (protected) . The lower part provides a list to display the Protected boards currently in the displayed scheme. This right side is divided into two parts. A delete button enables user to remove a protected board from a scheme. the right part is displayed empty. a) Scheme displaying To display a specific scheme.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 152/386 . as many protected boards as wanted. The Cancel push button closes the dialog box. Choose Protecting button becomes insensitive and Choose Protected becomes sensitive. The user can add. After that operation. If user clicks where there is no item displayed.

the user selects a scheme in the left list. When the right part of window is correctly filled. user could add protected boards. All rights reserved. To delete an existing protection scheme. user could delete the scheme. d) Scheme modification To modify an existing protection scheme by adding or removing protection units. Figure 132. Passing on and copying of this document. The Cancel push button cancels the creation and closes the dialog box.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 153/386 . Using the Delete button. EPS: board selection Figure 133. the OK button close the dialog box and modify the scheme. user could remove protected elements from scheme. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Using Choose button for protected elements. EPS: choose protected ED 02 SC. the user selects a scheme in the left list. By selecting a protected board and using the Delete Protected button.

3 Configuration: revertive and WTR for EPS This functionality configures Revertive and Wait Time to restore in a protection scheme. Figure 134. The EPS functional state of a board selected in the board view is displayed at the bottom of the view as shown in the following figures. Figure 136. EPS functional state from protected active board view All rights reserved. Then select the Configure. In order to configure. perform the following operations: • Select a transmission board in the Equipment view. EPS Management dialogue box The dialog box provides configuration for elements such as: • The name of the protecting element as a label • The Equipment Type (board) of the protecting element as a label • A list displaying the protected elements owned by the scheme ED 02 SC. Figure 137. Figure 135. • Select the EPS pull down menu. Passing on and copying of this document. EPS functional state from protecting active board view 12. Configure EPS The following dialogue box is opened. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 154/386 .

For this NE: • 1+1 ATM MATRIX 4x4 is Not Revertive only • 1+1 ATM MATRIX 8x8 is Not Revertive only • 1+1 PR_EA is Not Revertive only • 1+1 ES-16 is Not Revertive only • 1+1 ISA DVB-ASI is Not Revertive only All rights reserved. from 60 to 600). Figure 138. The available values are revertive and non revertive • The wait time to restore time value (steps of 30 seconds. use and communication of its contents • 1+1 COMPACT ADM is Not Revertive only not permitted without written authorization. Then select the Switch. Only for N+1 EPS.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 155/386 . In order to switch an EPS.4 Switching EPS This functionality enables to force a protecting board to work even if there is not failure. 12. • N+1 63 x 2 Mbit/s (P63E1 or P63E1N) protection is Revertive • N+1 3x34/45 Mbit/s (P3E3/T3) protection is Revertive • N+1 4xSTM-1 ELECTRICAL port (P4ES1N) protection is Revertive When the configuration of the equipment protection scheme is completed confirm closing the dialog box by clicking on the OK push button. Switching EPS The following dialogue box is opened. perform the following operations: • Select a transmission board in the Equipment view. The forced switch will fail if the other board is already forced switched or if the protecting board has a failure condition. • Select the EPS pull down menu. Notes: in the current release the Wait Time to Restore is fixed to 5 minutes. • The Revertive Mode flag as an option menu. ED 02 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialog box.

5 EPS Overview EPS Overview allows displaying as well as search for EPS states. Opens: Figure 140. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. 12. a filtering for all protection units located on a dedicated Board Type as well as a filtering for protection units carrying a specific Status. Selecting the EPS Overview option from the Configuration pull down menu Figure below. by clicking on the relevant radio button. in the current release. Clicking on the OK push button will initiate the switch and close the dialogue box. active only if the other board is not alarmed. Passing on and copying of this document. The Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes the dialogue box.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 156/386 . From this dialogue box the operator can configure. The search criteria can be chosen with the help of a combo box: ED 02 SC. only the Lockout options. Figure 139. The Manual to command perform the "manual" switch. EPS Switch dialogue box This dialogue box displays in its left part the EPS of the selected board. EPS overview To Search the EPS groups two different ways of filtering are supported.

) Figure 141.Status: allows filtering for all possible EPS protection states. Passing on and copying of this document. the following values should be offered (examples): • Ignore • Normal • DNR • Auto-Fail • Auto-WTR • Manual • Lockout After the filter selection click on Search button to start. the following filters values should be offered (examples) • 1+1 ATM MATRIX 4x4 is Not Revertive only • 1+1 ATM MATRIX 8x8 is Not Revertive only • 1+1 PR_EA is Not Revertive only • 1+1 ES–16 is Not Revertive only • 1+1 ISA DVB-ASI is Not Revertive only • 1+1 COMPACT ADM is Not Revertive only • N+1 63 x 2 Mbit/s (P63E1 or P63E1N–M4) protection is Revertive All rights reserved. EPS overview after Search (Example) ED 02 SC. use and communication of its contents • N+1 3x34/45 Mbit/s (P3E3/T3) protection is Revertive not permitted without written authorization. the field below the Search button will be updated (see Figure below.Board Type: allows filtering for the EPS protected boards. • N+1 4x STM–1 ELECTRICAL port (P4ES1N) protection is Revertive • N+1 16x STM–1 ELECTRICAL port (P16S1–4E) protection is Revertive . .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 157/386 .

In this way the operator has a quick link towards the views showing the correlation between the alarms and the protection states. Passing on and copying of this document.Cyan (Indicative) for protecting protection unit active and no fail condition present in the schema (Do Not Revert State) At the button of the EPS Overview windows are available five buttons that allows navigating through the EPS management views and subrack view. Protection Status: defines the current state of the protection unit follow • Normal • DNR (Do Not Revert) • Auto-Fail (Auto switch Equipment Fail) • Auto-WTR (Auto switch Wait Time to Restore) • Manual (Manual switch) • Force (Force switch. Green (OK): for protected protection units active . • F (Faulty) .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 158/386 . use and communication of its contents • S (Standby) not permitted without written authorization.) The possible protection states and the relevant symbols are explained in the following: ED 02 SC. Before to click on one of the five buttons select a row The buttons available are: .Orange (Major): for protected units in standby after a command and protecting protection unit in standby for auto switch or commands . protection unit in lockout or active on auto switch or commands .Red (Critical): for protected protection units in fail condition. Protection Group (example protection Groupld. B Status (board status) • A (Active) All rights reserved. Board Id (example r01sr1/board#15) . Board Role: • Ped (Protected) • Ping (Protecting) .B. 15) .Open Subrack View: opens the Subrack view showing the protection states with icons on the boards (see Figure below. board view. N. not supported in current release) • Lockout The colors used for each row have the following meaning: . Each protection unit is presented with the following information: .

and the relevant description.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 159/386 . Passing on and copying of this document. EPS Management: opens the EPS Management dialog box. and the relevant description. Fail) Manual All rights reserved. Open Board View: opens the board view showing the alarm and the board administrative states not permitted without written authorization. Subrack view after “Open Subrack View” command ED 02 SC. . Symbol EPS protection status No Request Do not Revert Lockout Auto Switch (WTR. Open Commands: opens the EPS Switch dialog box. EPS Parameters: opens the EPS Configuration dialog box. . use and communication of its contents . Clock on Close button to exit from the EPS Overview window Figure 142. and the relevant description. .

3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA Board view after “Open Board View” command 160/386 . SC. All rights reserved. ED 02 Figure 143. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.

The SD threshold reference values depend on the NE selected threshold on the MS termination point. No k1/k2 communication protocol is provided thus this protection can be only single ended. 13.2 MSP Options Introduction All the MSP options are available starting from the Port View following the step explained below: . Select Equipment from the Views menu . The MS Linear Trail Protection can be applied to any NE where it is possible to configure a linear APS (single ended/dual ended) line protection. where a path signal is protected not permitted without written authorization. In single ended mode (unidirectional) the protection is accomplished by switching only the signal affected by the failure. When occurs a multiplex section failure. Architecture 1+1 Optimized (not used) Architecture 1 : 1 Standard (not used) Described in ITU-T Rec. At the source the signal is duplicated and sent to the sink via two independent cables.Select the MSP block in the port view and then choose the MSP options by clicking on Port -> MSP menu. The spare interface can be used to transport "low priority traffic". Passing on and copying of this document. Signal Degrade (SD) software setting enables the MSP protection mechanisms when a SD is recognized on the working port. The protection can be set both in single (unidirectional) and in dual (bidirectional) ended mode. The reference switching criteria are SF and SD. It provides revertive mode managed by k1/k2 protocol and thus this protection can be single or dual ended.1 Architecture types The Multiplex Section Protection in the connection between two NEs protected by cable and port duplication. Architecture 1+1 or N+1 Standard Described in ITU-T Rec. by another dedicated path carrying the same signal. 13 Multiplex Section Protection Management 13. It provides a k1/k2 communication protocol thus this protection can be single or dual ended. m the APS 1+1 Standard and the APS 1:1 Standard dual ended. the system switches to the other cable and port.783/G841 as architecture 1 : n (with n=1). G.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 161/386 . Architecture 1+1 Proprietary (not used) The reference switching criteria are SF and SD. use and communication of its contents The APS 1+1 (not revertive) feature permits a 1+1 protection in a linear link. Double click on the port icon to open the port view . In dual ended mode (bidirectional) the protection is accomplished by switching both the affected and the unaffected signals. For this NE is applicable the APS 1+1 Proprietary. the possible choice are: • MSP Create ED 02 SC. Double click on the SDH optical board to configure to open the port icon . G783/G841. The WTR time is used with revertive mode. The reference switching criteria are SF and SD. All rights reserved.

MSP Create Option Figure 145.3 MSP Create Select the MSP Create option from the Port -> MSP menu (see Figure below. Figure 144. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.) to open the MSP Schema Creation. • MSP Management • MSP Commands • MSP Delete MSP Create. MSP Management. MSP Commands and MSP Delete can also be accessed from the Transmission-> MSP menu 13. All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 162/386 . MSP Schema Creation ED 02 SC.

Figure below is opened. Passing on and copying of this document. Select a Port Role (protected or protecting) All rights reserved. MSP 1+1 standard . Figure below. Define SDH Priority (type of traffic. Choose Port . use and communication of its contents . In this release two MSP Protection Schemas are supported: . . MSP N: 1 standard Select one and then click on Add Port button in the Ports field to create a MSP schema. MSP schema creation Port dialog Select the Choose Port button to define the "Protected Port" and "Protecting Port" units.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 163/386 . High or Low) Figure 146. ED 02 SC. Is opened Following steps are necessary: . Define Channel Id (mandatory for MSP N: 1) not permitted without written authorization.

The complete TP research description is reported in the "Transmission View". Click on the OK button and repeat the operation for both “Protected Port" and "Protecting Port". If it has been selected a Protected/Protecting port configured in a previously MSP schema protection an error message of access denied will be appear on the screen. It is possible to select the board through the "Board History" button selecting the board list menu. No revertive • N+1 Standard can be only dual-ended Revertive.All rights reserved. The "termination Points" list (right side) is available.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 164/386 . Figure 147. OpS class must be selected. On this right side select the OpS TP of the chosen board and then click on the OK button. Passing on and copying of this document. At the end click on the OK button to confirm the MSP protection schema configuration. Also configure the MSP protection schema with the chosen Protection Schema and enter the related Schema Parameters according the following rules: • 1+1 Standard can be dual-ended or single-ended. TP Search Click on Rack-Subrack and select the Board (Protected/Protecting) on the "Equipment" window (left side). An error message will be appear if the NE does not support the selected schema ED 02 SC. The "Filter Section" is divided into different fields. It permits to visualize a reduced TP Class. If used. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. In the dialogue of Figure below.

Schema Parameters: • Dual Ended / Single Ended protection switch and directionality. Ports area display the current MSP schema: ED 02 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. MSP 1+1 standard protection schema (example) 13. • Enable Switch on SD is not operative in current release. • Revertive/Non Revertive mode • The WTR Time (Wait to Restore) is the delay time for switching protection and protecting port after recovery from failure / defect. Protection Schema reported in the previous paragraph Architecture Types . . Passing on and copying of this document. MSP Management Option The MSP Schema Configuration dialog shows the current state of the MSP schema.4 MSP Management Select the MSP Management option from the Port -> MSP menu (see Figure below) to open the MSP Schema Configuration. Figure 149. setting and state (protected or protecting) of the current SDH-n port. Figure 148.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 165/386 .All rights reserved. This dialog allows setting the configuration parameters for the designated multiplex section: .

3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 166/386 . value is 14) • Priority: type of traffic. Before changing a single ended (unidirectional) schema into a dual ended (bidirectional).1 MSP modification The same MSP Management option can be used to modify the schema parameters of an active MSP configuration. MSP Management View 13.4. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. If the operator wants to change the protection schema architecture or the ports involved in the MSP schema. • Port Id: identify the location of the board • Role: identify the role of the board ("Protecting" or "Protected") • Channel Id: mandatory for MSP N:1 (max. the current schema must be removed and re-created. all active switches must be cleared (manual switch. All rights reserved. lockout. ED 02 SC. Figure 150.). At the end click on the OK button to configure the MSP protection schema. Passing on and copying of this document. High or Low Configure the MSP protection Schema with the chosen protection schema and enter the related schema parameters. An error message will be appear if the selected schema in not supported by the NE.

3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 167/386 . MSP Schema Deletion Click on "OK" button to delete the selected MSP Schema Configuration ED 02 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 151.5 MSP Delete Select the MSP Delete option from the Port->MSP menu (see Figure below.) to open the "MSP Schema Deletion". Passing on and copying of this document. 13. All rights reserved. MSP Delete option Figure 152.

Passing on and copying of this document.(green color) Displayed if an automatic switch All rights reserved. Only present when a command is operative. idle condition.Remote: switch due to received K1/K2 bytes.Failure (in case of FOP) ED 02 SC. The status indications are: not permitted without written authorization. The following states are always displayed: Port Status . the SF or SD has been recovered but the traffic is switched on the spare port PF: a protection failure has been detected on the port RF: a release command has been failed FOP: a failure of protocol has been detected Complete: = the bridge/switch actions are completed Pending: = the bridge/switch actions are pending The "complete" and "pending" indications precede the following statuses: AS: automatic protection switching enabled MS: a manual local protection command has been activated FS: a forced local protection command has been activated LO: a lockout local protection command has been activated SF/SD: Signal Failure or Signal Degraded has been detected WTR: wait time to restore status MSP Request Source . 13. The standby protection status is referred to a protecting/protected port that is ready to save the traffic. The active protection status is referred to a protected/protecting port (where the traffic is transported): when a failure is detected.Active (red color) or Standby (orange color). NR: (abbreviation of No Request). MSP Group Status. use and communication of its contents is requested.6 Display of Protection State The MSP protection state of a port is displayed at the bottom of the Port view. the protecting port is ready to save the traffic (and becomes active).3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 168/386 . but can be overwritten by a switch with higher priority. MSP Protocol Status This parameter indicates the current APS Protocol status. "Related Unit" stands for the related unit of the same protection group. The following values are possible: .Local: switch due to near end SD/SF or local user switch command . MSP Own Unit and MSP Related Unit .OK . A remote switch cannot be released locally. the traffic is on the main port DNR: (abbreviation of Do Not Revert).(green color) indicates where the operator commands (force/manual/lockout) have been performed. "Own Unit" stands for the currently displayed unit in the port view. . Some examples are reported in Figure below. normal.

3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 169/386 . shows where the forced command is applied. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. In any situation are represent the statuses displayed on both protected/protecting Port views. Represent a MSP configuration with a normal condition. The Active status indication. ED 02 SC.All rights reserved. with an automatic protection switching and with a forced command. Figure 153. with a forced command on the protecting group. MSP Protection Status Examples Figure up. Passing on and copying of this document.

Figure 154.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 170/386 . It is possible to "Lockout the Protecting Port" or "Lockout the Protected Port". Is also possible to switch back to the working channel using again the "Manual to" Protected port command. this command will be carried out regardless of the working section condition. The Exercise command issues an exercise request for protection channel and checks response on MSP bytes. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. For 1+1 non-revertive system. unless an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exits on the protection section. Since manual switch has lower priority than SF or SD on working section. Protected Port: the location of the board hosting the protected port is displayed. Since forced switch has higher priority than SF or SD on working section. ED 02 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. All rights reserved. by issuing a "Forced" switch request for that port (on the "Protection Status" of MSP Management). unless a failure condition exits on the protection section or an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect. This check controls the k1/k2 communication protocol functionality to be sure that the protocol is right also on the protection section. unless an equal or higher priority request is in effect. forced switch no working channel transfer the working channel back from protection to working section. unless an equal or higher priority request is in effect. It is also possible to switch back to the working channel using again the "Forced to" Protected port command. to remove the lockout commands select Release Ping (for the protecting) and Release Ped (for the protected). unless the protection channel is in use. manual switch no working channel transfers the working channel back from protection to working section. For 1+1 non-revertive system.7 MSP Commands Select the MSP Commands option from the Port -> MSP menu (see Figure below) to open the "MSP Command window". The lockout of protection command denies working channel access to the protection section by issuing a "Lockout" of protection request (on the "Protection Status" of MSP Management). The Manual to command switches the working channel (Protection port) to the protection section (Protection port). this command will be carried out only if the working section is not in SF or SD condition The Clear WTR command cancels the delay time for switching protection and protecting port after recovery from failure/defect. The Force to command switches the working channel (Protected port) to the protection section (Protecting port). 13. by issuing a "Manual" switch request for that port (on the "Protection Status)" of MSP Management). MSP Commands option Protecting Port: the location of the board hosting the protecting port is displayed.

The row/column crossing gives the command or protection result (i. The first column on the left and the first row at the top report the switch protection and the external MSP commands. The Release command clears all previously switching commands.e. MSP commands and Auto-switch protection priority Forced to Auto--switch Manual to Lockout of Protection Lockout Lockout Lockout Lockout of ______________ Protection Forced to Lockout Forced Forced ______________ Auto--switch Lockout Forced Auto--switch ______________ Manual to Lockout Forced Auto--switch ______________ ED 02 SC. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 171/386 . Gives the priority rules when are occurred two different commands. Force to. Figure 155. Not operative in current release.\ All rights reserved. Manual to. Table 1. Table 2. Auto- switch (SF&SD). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.: if an "Auto-switch" and a "Manual to" command are present. "Auto-switch" is operative. MSP Commands The priority levels for the MSP commands are (from the higher to the lower one)_ Lockout.

The search criteria can be chosen with the help of a combo box: . MSP overview To Search the MSP groups two different ways of filtering are supported. a filtering foe all protection units located on a dedicated Board Type as well as a filtering for protection units’ carrying a specific Status. the following filters values should be offered (example): • Ignore • P4ES1N • P4S1N • P4E4N • P4S4N • P8S1-4E • S-41N • L-41N • L-42N ED 02 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved. Selecting the MSP Overview option from the Configuration pull down menu Figure below opens.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 172/386 . Figure 156.Board Type: allows filtering for the MSP protected boards. 13. Passing on and copying of this document.8 MSP overview MSP Overview allows displaying as well as search for MSP states.

the following filters values should be offered (example): • Ignore • NR (Normal) • DNR • Auto-SF • Auto-SD • Auto-WTR • Manual • Force • Lockout • APS Invalid (Fail) • Bad channel (Fail) After the filter selection click on Search button to start. • SYNTH16N . Passing on and copying of this document.) ED 02 SC. the field below the Search button will be update (see Figure below. • S-161 • S-161N • S-161ND • L-161 • L-161N • L-161ND • L-162 • L-162N • L-162ND All rights reserved.Status: allows to filter for all possible EPS protection states. use and communication of its contents • SYNTH16 not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 173/386 .

160) .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 174/386 . Protection Group (example protection Groupld. Passing on and copying of this document. Protection Status: defines the current state of the protection unit as follow • NR (Normal) • DNR (Do Not Revert) • Auto-SF (AutoSwitch Signal Degrade) • Auto-SD (AutoSwitch Signal Degrade) • Auto-WTR (AutoSwitch Wait Time To Restore) ED 02 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Status (board status): • A (Active) • S (Standby) • F (Faulty) • ET Extra Traffic (Not operative) . Port Id (example r01sr1sl9/port#01-OpS) .All rights reserved. Figure 157. MSP overview after Search (Example) Each protection unit is presented with the following information: . Role: • Ped Protected • Ping Protecting .

Orange (Major) for protected units in standby after a command and protecting protection unit in standby not permitted without written authorization. MSP Commands: opens the MSP Commands dialog box Click on Close button to exit from the MSP Overview window ED 02 SC. MSP Management: opens the MSP Management dialog box . Passing on and copying of this document.Open Port view: opens the port view showing the correlation between the alarm and the MSP protection states.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 175/386 . Before to click on one of the five buttons select a row The buttons available are: . • Manual (Manual Switch) • Force • Lockout • APS Invalid (Protection fail condition APS invalid) • Bad channel (Protection fail condition Channel Mismatch) The colors used for each row have the following meaning: . (See Figure below) . protection unit in lockout or active on autoswitch on commands All rights reserved. . for autoswitch or commands . MSP Create: opens the MSP Create dialog box. By clicking on Open Port View the operator has a quick link towards the view showing the correlation between the alarms and the protection states. MSP Delete: opens the MSP Delete dialog box . Green (OK): for protected protection units active . use and communication of its contents .Cyan (Indicative: for protecting protection unit active and no fail condition present in the schema (Do Not Revert State) At the bottom of the MSP Overview windows are available five buttons that allows to navigate through the MSP management views and to open the Port View.Red (Critical): for protected protection units in fail condition.B. N.

ED 02 Figure 158.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA Port view after “Open Port View” commands 176/386 . All rights reserved. SC. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.

Expanding and hiding TPs that are related to the currently selected TP (e.1 Overview This section describes the operations necessary for the consultation. TPs down to AU-4). • Display of single or multiple termination points. TP names are listed in an additional information area if the mouse pointer is positioned over it.The alarm synthesis icon indicates the alarm state . ƒ Pop-up the Transmission View from the board view. • Provide the possibility of configuring a selected TP.A circle indicates whether a TP can be structured .A cross indicates the cross-connection state . The following states are indicated: . modification and configuration of TPs. • Brief overview regarding transmission resources. • Provide the functionality to create/show cross-connections. document.g. The generic Transmission View. offers the possibility of displaying a single TP or a set of all kinds of TPs (or collected functionality which is represented by one/several TPs).g. Passing on and copying of this dialog or access the view directly from another view. To display the termination points in the Transmission View. 14 TRANSMISSION VIEW 14. described in this chapter. thus providing a representation of the entire signal flow. Calling the configuration dialogs of the common Transmission/Port Views category accesses this functionality.e. • Provide the possibility of showing a detailed view of a TP with alarms.Whether a TP is involved in a loop action. • Provide the functionality to create/show Multiplex Section Protection (Not operative in the current release) • Provide the functionality to create/show Loopback commands. either select specific TPs from a TP search All rights reserved. ED 02 SC. an arrow indicates it • An overview concerning signal flow can be requested by a user action. ƒ Search for and select a termination point in a TP search dialog and display it in the Transmission View. All TPs/compound TPs associated with the physical port are displayed (i.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 177/386 . show all TPs that are above the TU-12 CTP) enables all related TPs to be added to the view.Whether a TP is under Performance Monitoring indicated by a blue "P" letter . by navigating from the Port View. navigating to the Port view. e. The user can select a TP and apply the action Show Cross-connected TPs. use and communication of its contents The Transmission View provides the following features: not permitted without written authorization. ƒ An overview concerning all TPs belonging to a port can be called in by activating the function to expand the selected TP. The result is that the objects related to the TP are displayed and lines indicate the connections. providing a representation of the entire signal flow. • Provide the possibility of showing and setting Performance Monitoring parameters and data.

ED 02 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 178/386 .1 View Description Figure below. Symbols Used in Transmission View 14. 14. All rights reserved. which display the transmission resources.3 View Layout The Transmission View is a main view. TPs that are received from the network element are displayed in the Transmission View with the respective TP and connection symbols described in The number of TPs presented initially depends on whether the Transmission View is popped up from a board view. 14. Figure 159. which provides the Transmission View operations. and the specific Transmission View pull down menu.2 View elements The Transmission View uses the symbols illustrated in Figure below.3. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. It provides views of specific areas. whether a TP has been selected in another view or whether it is called without a selected TP. When the "Transmission view" is reached selecting the Transmission option in the View pull down menu in its initial state contains no objects. Illustrates the Transmission View area. Passing on and copying of this document.

thus displaying all underlying TPs. Figure 160. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. which are of no interest.3. The objects initially displayed depend on the situation/definition.All rights reserved. 14.3. • All child nodes contain a short label indicating the position inside the tree.2 Number of TPs Displayed in Transmission View It is possible both to expand a VC-4.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 179/386 . ED 02 SC. Transmission View Area 14.3 Naming TPs The following rules are applied in order to identify the TPs displayed: • The root node contains the full user label. and to hide TPs.

Example: modification of the payload structure from 63 TU-12 to 3 TU-3. • TP Configuration Set parameters for the Overhead on Synchronous TP's. 14. use and communication of its contents is always initialized and the corresponding objects are then displayed in it. In the case of navigation from another view (example the "Port view") to the Transmission View. Alarm notification The alarm synthesis icons of the TP objects indicate alarms concerning the TPs displayed graphically. only the selected TP is displayed.3. Working state of the view In its working state.704 or ISDN-PRA management • TP Threshold Configuration Set B2 ExBER and Degraded Signal parameters. The graphical objects are removed accordingly from the Transmission View. the Transmission View is always initialized and the corresponding objects are then displayed in it. The All rights reserved.4 Transmission view access and menu The "Transmission view" can be reached selecting the Transmission option in the View pull down menu. the Transmission View contains no objects. If the operator searches for and displays a TP using the TP Search dialog. • TP Frame Mode Configuration Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 180/386 .703/G. The TP objects are updated accordingly. not permitted without written authorization. the Transmission View already contains objects. • Hide Hide TPs that are related to the selected TP or the selected TP. Navigation to Transmission View from other views If the Transmission View is popped up from the Port View. in its initial state. Object deletion The TP objects indicate all kinds of object deletion events related to TPs displayed. Passing on and copying of this same applies in the case of navigation from another view to the Transmission View . • Terminate TP Terminate a path on a AU-4 CTP • Disterminate TP Disterminate a path on a AU-4 CTP • AU4 Concatenation • Cross-Connection Manage the connection of the paths. Selecting the "Transmission" option in the menu bar the complete pull down Transmission menu is presented The following menu items are available: • Add TP Select the TP to show on the Transmission view. 14.4 Dynamic View Behaviour The following section describes the view states and provides a short description of events that affect the view. Initial state of the view In its initial state. the view is first initialized again and then the TP is displayed. the Transmission View contains no objects. In this case.the Transmission View document. Objects can be searched for and displayed using the Add TP dialog. ED 02 SC. • Expand Display TPs that are related to the selected TP.

Transmission menu options 14. • Performance Set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. 14.g. Not available for PDH port. The TP Search dialog enables the user to search for and add a TP to the Transmission View (e. • not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 181/386 . ED 02 SC. for commissioning or maintenance purposes • Physical Media Manage the physical TP setting.5 Add TP Select the Transmission -> Add TP option.5. Passing on and copying of this document. not used in this NE. • Structure TPs Provides the possibility of structuring and destructuring selected TP • Loopback Manage the loopback commands. In this paragraph is not described the MSP>NE MSP synthesis option of the Transmission menu. search for all TPs on a board with PM enabled). See MSP Management. configure and delete POM/SUT and TC TP's. Figure 161. use and communication of its contents • Show Supported Board Navigate to the upper board level. • Monitoring Operations Create. These options are described in next paragraphs except the previously referenced. All rights reserved. Navigate to Port View Permit to show the detailed alarm of the TP. • MSP Manage the Multiplex Section Protection of the NE.1 TP Search This menu item opens the TP Search dialog.

they are displayed in a hierarchical order. Figure 162. The message text corresponds to the object selected. To select a block of TPs.g. the contents of the port appear on the right-hand side of the dialog (TP list). an Information window appears (see). the dialog displays the structure of the equipment tree. Figure 163. To keep the number of itemsdisplayed small. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Initial State After double-clicking on an object. Information Window It is possible to select several individual TPs from the TP list by clicking on them while holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard. TP Search Dialog. After double-clicking. e. Double-click again to recall the next level. Default Mode In this mode. click on the first TP and then click on the last TP in the block ED 02 SC. All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 182/386 . Passing on and copying of this document. on a port.

Figure 164. while holding down the Shift key on the keyboard. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 02 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 183/386 . Passing on and copying of this document. TP Search Dialog with Various TP Selections After clicking on Show CC State. All rights reserved. a more detailed TP list is displayed containing TP cross connection status information. But only the first TP selected in the list will be shown in the Transmission View.

Board History Check List ED 02 SC. Figure 165. TP Search Dialog with Status Information Displayed The symbols in the TP list have the following significance: Figure 166.All rights reserved. Symbols in TP Search The background color of the symbols represents the status of the TP: • Grey = inactive • Green = active An easy way to recall to previously displayed boards is to use Board History. Figure 167.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 184/386 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. Select the relevant board from the list.

PPI. warning. Monitoring (Performance Monitoring condition): Ignore. TU-3+VC-3. NML. MS. GMAU. OGP. VC-12. VC-4. TU-3. OpS. minor. RS. not connected. AU-4. connected • Alarm State (Path Trace): All rights reserved. The following options are available: • Class: Ignore.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 185/386 . TU-12+VC12. not alarmed not permitted without written authorization. major. EML • Perf. AUX. Passing on and copying of this document. Search Mode Use Search Mode together with the filtering options provided below the TP list. E1S. • Assign State: Ignore. TU2. TU-12. use and communication of its contents Ignore. AU-4+VC-4. enabled • TTI expect: not used • TTI receive: not used • TTI transmit: not used • Location: Permits to insert the location of the TP in the following format: r<rack#>sr<subrack#>sl<slot#><port#> • Name: not supported ED 02 SC. • Connection State (Current connectivity status): Ignore. critical.

TP Search Dialog with Different Filtering Options After activating the search process with the Search TP button. Clicking on Cancel can interrupt the search. Common Buttons The following buttons are available in all modes: Ok Closes the dialog and opens the Transmission View containing the selected TP. the following dialog box appears. Rack or Subrack. the time for the request can be very high. Figure 169. Figure 168.B..All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. “Information. Passing on and copying of this document. Close Closes the dialog without updating the Transmission View. ED 02 SC..” Dialog for Search Process N. When searching for PM-enabled TPs on NE.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 186/386 . It is recommended to search for PM-enabled TPs at the board level (a board is selected for the search).

Print This command is used to generate and print a list of TPs according to the current filter selection. Print to File Enter the name of the output file in the input field or select a file name from the File Select dialog by clicking on Select file. Figure 170. Example Printout ED 02 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 172. The dialog changes after clicking on File: Figure 171. Select if the output format should be Postscript or ASCII. Print to Printer Select the desired printer from the list box and click on Ok to start the print job or abort with Cancel. The command opens the following dialog: All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 187/386 . The output file is generated after clicking on Ok. Use Cancel to stop the process.

6 TP Configuration Select the Transmission -> TP Configuration option.6.1. TP Configuration can also be accessed from the "Port" view menu. The dialogs of the following figure appears: Figure 173.1 High Order TP Configuration Depending on the TP selected. 14. High Order TP Configuration 14. 14. If the Path Trace is 16 bytes long. Help This command opens the online help for the TP-Search dialog. a dialog appears for the configuration of the main parameters of the objects. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 188/386 .6. ED 02 SC. use and communication of its contents • VC-4 TTP (140 Mbit/s PDH) not permitted without written authorization. the first byte is a CRC7 checksum calculated by NE.1 J1 Path Trace Operative only on VC-4 in current release. • J1 Path Trace. Example: All rights reserved. • VC-3 TTP (34 and 45 Mbit/s PDH) • Mod VC-4 TTP (matrix resource) The main parameters are: • C2 Signal Label: "Automatic" (decided by the NE) or "Equipped not specific".

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. If the Path Trace is shorter than 16 bytes. enter the default manually according to the following table . J1 hexadecimal editor (example) 14.6. use and communication of its contents Table 3. With the relevant button the operator can set the Expected field as: .TTI Repeated The Transmitted field can be set with TTI Enable or TTI Repeated byte Empty TTI button permits to send an all zeroes path trace.TTI Enable . They can display the following number. according the G. Expected and Transmitted fields are read only.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 189/386 .2 C2 Signal Label Received.1.707 recommendations for the C2 Signal Label: • 0: Unequipped • 1: Equipped non-specific ED 02 SC. Default value for C2/V5 Signal Label not permitted without written authorization.TTI Disable . Figure 174. it is filled with zero bytes ("0" hexadecimal). To replace modified with the default. TP VC-4 TTP / AU4 CTP VC-4 TTP VC3-TTP VC-12 TTP (SDH) (PDH) Significant Byte C2 C2 C2 V5 Default value 2 18 4 2 Click on Hex button will be opened displaying in hexadecimal code the same value reported in Transmitted and received field. Received fields are read only.

With the relevant button it is possible to enable or disable TTI Monitoring. The main parameters are: • V5 Signal Label. Passing on and copying of this document. Expected and Transmitted fields are editable by the operator. J0 Configuration This function is implemented in order to manage the J0 Trace configuration. In the Transmitted field it is possible to select the values: • Automatic: the NE according the VC structure automatically selects the C2 Signal Label value.6. • 2: TUG structure • 3: Locked TU-n • 4: Asynchronous 34/45Mbyte • 18: Asynchronous 140Mbyte • 19: ATM • 20: MAN.2 J0 Section Trace management Select RST block and then select Port -> TP Configuration The fields of the following figure appears: Figure 175. Click on Hex button will be opened displaying in hexadecimal code the same value reported in Transmitted and received field. This dialog shows the current values for received. ED 02 SC.6. The received trail trace is read-only. All rights reserved. 14. DQDB • 21: FDDI. "Automatic" (decided by the NE) or "Equipped not specific".3 Low Order TP Configuration Depending on the TP selected.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 190/386 . a dialog to configure the main parameters of the following objects: • VC-12 TTP. expected and transmitted trail trace and it allows the operator to change only the values of expected and transmitted trail trace. use and communication of its contents • Equipped not specific (it corresponds to number 1) not permitted without written authorization. 14.

Figure 177.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 191/386 . The following dialogs appears: All rights reserved. Low Order TP Configuration Click on Hex button will be opened displaying in hexadecimal code the same value reported in Transmitted and received field. Not operative in current release. Passing on and copying of this document. J2 hexadecimal editor ED 02 SC. Figure 176. • J2 Path Trace. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.

Empty TTI send an all zeroes path trace. Expected and Transmitted fields are editable by the operator.2 V5 Signal Label Received. not permitted without written authorization.6.707 recommendations for the V5 Signal Label: • 0: Unequipped • 1: Equipped non-specific • 2: Asynchronous • 3: Bit Synchronous • 4: Byte Synchronous In the Transmitted field it is possible to select the values: • Automatic: the NE according the VC structure automatically selects the C2 Signal Label value. If the Path Trace is 16 bytes long. the first byte is a CRC7 checksum calculated by the NE. They can display the following number. Passing on and copying of this document. Mode1 enable the 16 bytes long sequence for Path trace One repeated byte allows setting one byte that will be repeated Received fields are read only. enter the default manually according to the value reported in Table 2.1 J2 Path Trace Not operative in current release. All rights reserved. Expected and Transmitted fields are read only. If the Path Trace is shorter than 16 bytes. 14. according the G. it is filled with zero bytes ("0" hexadecimal).3. • Equipped not specific (it corresponds to number 1) To replace modified with the default. 14. use and communication of its contents With the relevant button it is possible to enable or Disable TTI Monitoring.3. ED 02 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 192/386 .6.

Figure 178.703 interface): the PRA function cannot be activate.7 TP Frame Mode Configuration This command is available for: . Passing on and copying of this document. "CRC4 Mode" that defines the monitoring capabilities applied to the signal with a CRC multiframe: • "Enabling": enable or disable the CRC-4 error counting • "Remote Indication": red-only field that indicates if status of CRC-4 error counting functionality of far- end NE is enabled or disabled ED 02 SC. TP Frame Mode Configuration The windows contains the following graphical objects: .704 frame management. • "Framed without PRA" (G.703/G. . This menu item enables the configuration of the most important transmission parameters concerning the Primary Rate Access and G. the user can choose one of the following value: • "Not Framed" (G. 14. The following dialog appears: All rights reserved."Framed Signal Mode" that allows to configure the attribute framed Signal Mode. • "Framed with PRA" : PRA function are activated • "Framed with leased line PRA" a proprietary leased line behavior is a applied. defect detection and consequent action. P12 Select the Transmission -> TP Frame Mode Configuration option TP Frame Mode Configuration can also be accessed from the "Port" and "Synchronization" view menu.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 193/386 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.704): the behavior according to ETS 300-233 is applied in the handling of bits of Time Slot 0 in terms of state.

Threshold: 1 or 10 or 100 or 1000 .Burst distribution enable configuration of the maximum number of error frames and the total a amount of bad block per frame. Will be opened. All rights reserved. .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 194/386 .Poisson distribution enable configuration of the Excessive Bit Error Ratio (ExBER on MST. ED 02 SC.Consecutive Bad Seconds: 2 to 10 Figure 179. use and communication of its contents Figure below. VCi) threshold and of the Signal Degrade (SD on MST. Burst Parameters .Threshold: 10-3 to 10-5 - Enable Consequent Actions: fixed to enables . "Frame Status" that reports an indication of the received signal: • "No indication" • "The 2Mb/s signal is multi-frame" Press OK to apply the parameters or Cancel to close the dialog 14. The user can select one of the two different Defect distributions: .8 TP Threshold Configuration This menu allows the operator to set the alarm thresholds for MST and VCi layer. Signal Degrade . Passing on and copying of this document. Burst Parameters .Threshold: 10-5 to 10-9 . . not permitted without written authorization. Select the MST or the VCi block Select the Transmission -> TP Threshold Configuration option. Degraded Signal Threshold selection Click on OK to confirm the chosen parameters. . ExBER . VC) threshold of the TP's related counted primitives.

14.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 195/386 . in order to confirm the TP distermination. 14. The related cross-connection is deleted. depending on whether a TP is terminated or not.9. A box message will be presented. in the same order as above listed. It can be performed on a AU-4 CTP.2 Disterminate TP Use this action to disterminate a path. such as: • Performance Monitoring on lower or higher TPs • POM / HPOM operations • Lower order Connections • Higher order Connections • Lower/Higher order Path Terminations • Loop–backs on lower TPs Thus the deletion of every operation/connection/termination is necessary. NOTE: the “Disterminate” action is not possible in the case that is still existing any operation/connection/termination on the underlying signals. Passing on and copying of this document.9. A cross appears in the icon of the terminated TP: All rights reserved. before disterminating a TP. Three TUG-3 and TU-3 are created if the modifiable VC-4 TTP was not already structured. 14. A cross-connection between the selected AU-4 CTP (= aTP) and a modifiable VC-4 TTP (= bTP) is created. It can be performed on a AU-4 CTP. If the TP is already cross-connected a error message appears. Only one command in the menu is available. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.1 Terminate TP Use this action to terminate a path.9 Terminate/Disterminate TP Select the Transmission -> Terminate TP or Disterminate TP option. ED 02 SC.

10 Monitoring Operations Select the Transmission -> Monitoring Operations option as for the following figure. All rights reserved. 14. Monitoring Operations Monitoring Operations can also be accessed from the "Port" view menu. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Supervised Unequipped Termination and Tandem Connection).1 Creation/Deletion The dialog allows multiple object creation/deletion.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 196/386 . Figure 180. The dialog shown in the following Figure below opens ED 02 SC. This command is available for: • AU-4 CTP • TU-3 CTP • TU-12 CTP 14. The commands of this menu item are for the management of the POM/SUT /TC (Path Overhead Monitoring. Creation/Deletion and Configuration options are present. Passing on and copying of this document.10.

3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 197/386 . TCT Bidirectional Before Matrix . Monitoring Operations Creation/Deletion The Path Overhead Monitoring has the following parameters: • Before Matrix (available only on AU-4 CTP) • After Matrix The Supervisory Unequipped Termination. Passing on and copying of this document. TCM After Matrix • Tandem Connection Termination (TCT): .All rights reserved. has the following parameters: • Sink (before matrix) • Sink (after matrix) • Source • Bidirectional The Tandem Connection has the following configurable parameters: • Tandem Connections Monitoring (TCM): . TCT Bidirectional After Matrix Press Ok to apply the parameters or Close to close the dialog and discard the not with Ok applied changes. TCM Before Matrix . When select and apply the Path Overhead Monitoring. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. not operative in current release. the changes will be displayed in the Port View in the following manner: ED 02 SC. Figure 181.

Figure 184. Figure 182. N. the changes will be displayed in the Port View in the following manner: All rights reserved.2 Configuration Depending on the parameters selected in the Monitoring Operations Creation/Deletion dialog. Figure 183. Monitor Configuration ED 02 SC. not all sections of the dialog are available. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. It is possible to open the POM and TCT/TCM Configuration dialog for a CTP even if neither Path Overhead Monitor nor Tandem Connection was created before (SUT isn't available in this release). No changes can be made in this case and the values displayed can be ignored.B. Passing on and copying of this document.10. Display of POM and TCM in Port View (example) When select and apply the Tandem Connection Monitoring / Tandem Connection Termination. Display of POM and TCM/TCT in Port View (example) 14.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 198/386 .

Passing on and copying of this document. TTI Definition The TTI (Trail Trace Identifier) has a maximum length of 16 characters. Alarm Timing Rising and Clearing Timing are not supported by OMSN. Unequipped Trail Not available ED 02 SC. Error Distribution Poisson and Burst error distribution are supported TCM/TCT Cons Actions It is needed to support explicit consequent action activation (AIS insertion) for TCT sink and bidirectional. • Burst Consecutive Select a value between 2 and 10 sec for the Burst Degrade Consecutive. use and communication of its contents • TTI Repeated Byte not permitted without written authorization. The following TTI Definitions are available: • TTI Expected • TTI Received without the display • TTI Sent The following TTI Types are available: • TTI Enabled • TTI Disabled All rights reserved. Thresholds Set the thresholds of the following parameters: • Signal Degrade Poisson mode only: from 10-5 to 10-9. • Excessive Error Poisson mode only: from 10-3 also if presented a selection from 10-3 to 10-5 • Burst Degrade Select a value between 1 and 1000 errors/sec for the Burst Degrade threshold.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 199/386 .

Passing on and copying of this document. Not supported. 14. Figure 185. The following items are available for synchronous TPs: • Modifiable VC-4 TTP: TU-3.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 200/386 . if a VC-4 TTP is selected and the menu item TU-12 is chosen. 14. e. • TU-3. the signal is structured down to 63 TU-12 CTPs. The loopback commands are used to separate the communication network into independent part checking the line/equipment functionality during the network installation or maintenance operation. TU-12 • TUG-2: TU-12. • TU-12. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved. • VC-3/VC-4. 14. • VC-12.12.12 Loopback The commands of this menu item are for the management of the loopback commands.1 Loopback Configuration The loopback can be applied at line (external to equipment) level or at internal equipment level. Structure TPs option This menu item provides the possibility of structuring and destructuring a selected TP. TU-12 • TUG-3: TU-3. for commissioning or maintenance purposes. Not supported. Not supported. The level that is selected defines how the signal is to be structured.11 Structure TPs Select the Transmission -> Structure TPs option. ED 02 SC.g. The following menu items represent all those possible: • TU-2.

etc. Loopback configurations Select a TP that supports the Loopback Configuration Loopback act on the following TPs: • PDH board (only from the Port View): .) . STM-4. Line Loopback And Continue Line Loopback And AIS Internal Loopback And Continue Internal Loopback and AIS All rights reserved.Line loopback performed on: ⎯ EIS for electrical STM-1 SPI ⎯ OpS for optical STM-1.Line loopback performed on: ⎯ P for 2/34/45/140 Mbit/s PPI .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 201/386 .Internal loopback performed on: ⎯ P12 for 2Mbit/s CTP ⎯ P31 for 34/45Mbit/s CTP ⎯ P4 for 140Mbit/s CTP • SDH board: The loopback configuration can be done only on SDH ports with the acronym ending with a "N" letter (i.2N. Passing on and copying of this document. The loopback architecture provides four configurations. STM-16 SPI .1N.Internal loopback performed on: ⎯ MsT TTP for STM-1. STM-4. L-4. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. STM-16 ports ED 02 SC.e. S-4. Figure 186. L-4. P4S1N.1N.

Port Loopback Configuration Figure below. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 202/386 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 188. Port Loopbacks View Choose the TP clicking on the "Choose TP" button. All rights reserved. ED 02 SC. Opens. For this NE the "Timed Loopbacks" field is not managed and thus Start/Stop loopbacks time is not editable. Select the Transmission -> Loopback -> Port Loopback Configuration option. Select the TP where to apply the loopback command. Figure 187. Port Loopback Configuration can also be accessed from the "Port" view menu.

Loopback Management ED 02 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.2 Loopback Management To manage the loopback configuration select the Transmission -> Loopback -> Loopback Management option. Opens. Loopback Management view Loopback Management can also be accessed from the "Port" view menu and from the "Configuration menu” Figure below. All rights reserved. Figure 189. Passing on and copying of this document. 14.12.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 203/386 . Figure 190.

The configured loopback are listed into the current loopback table. board. port# and the TP type: EIS (SPI/PPI Electrical). • Search Criteria (operative): to configure the filter select the "Loop and Continue" type (Yes= Loop And Continue. Loopback Port View Figure 192. Follow the previously paragraph indications to create a new loopback configuration. The activated loopbacks are signaled in the Port view and in the Transmission view as for the following figures: Figure 191. No= Loop And AIS) then select the "Directionality" Internal or Line and edit the Initial TP Id (write: rack. "Delete" and "Create" commands. • The "Delete" command permits to delete a loopback listed in the Current loopbacks Table: select a loopback in the list and click on the "Delete" button. use and communication of its contents previous figure opens.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 204/386 . OpS (SPI/PPI Optical). Click on the "Search" button to start the configured loopback research into the current loopback table. Enable the filter through the "Toggle Filter" Enable/Disable button. Passing on and copying of this document. not permitted without written authorization. This table can be managed by the "Search" criteria. subrack. MST and so on. • The "Create" command permits to create a new loopback configuration: clicking on "Create" the All rights reserved. For "Initial TP" has to be intended the outgoing signal while for "Destination TP" the incoming signal. Loopback Transmission View ED 02 SC.

. . .Extra traffic Not operative . 14. Passing on and copying of this document. It opens a menu in which the various options will be available according the TP's type (for the option common with the "Port view" reference is made to the relevant paragraph): .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 205/386 . .Single Fiber Configuration.Show Optical Configuration. All rights reserved. Physical Media options The Physical Media options permit to set physical configuration of each TP. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Regeneration Section management Not operative .X21 Configuration Not operative ED 02 SC.Line Length Configuration.Set Domain. .ALS Management.13 Physical Media Select the Transmission -> Physical Media option. Figure 193.NT Configuration Not operative . .HDSL Configuration Not operative .TX Quality Configuration.

The different domains could be assigned to different operators.1 Set Domain This option is referred to the Security management and allows the user to set the Manager list and the Access Control Domain of the selected TP. the Manager misses the NE connection). assigning it to the TP. OpS for Optical SDH port. RM. Set Domain ED 02 SC. Figure 194. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. not permitted without written authorization. The user can set a manager clicking on the denomination. Select the Set Domain option from the Physical Media cascade menu to present the following view: The dialog-box contains the following fields: • NML Assignment: each connected manager to the TP is highlighted in the list. Several managers can be enabled contemporaneously.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 206/386 . The EML-USM administrator (SH or Craft Terminal) should set the Manager List only to remove a manager in case of emergency (i.e. OK button is used to validate the selection. P (PPI) for PDH port. Select the block: EIS for Electrical SDH port. 14. having in charge the TP. SY. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. EML) that work on the NE. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog. NPOS .13. use and communication of its contents The Manager List contains the list of managers ( i. • Resource domain field allow selecting the domain among that displayed in the list.e.

Passing on and copying of this document. Hide option ED 02 SC.1 Expand Select the Transmission -> Expand option. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. These may be TPs that are contained by the TP or TPs. • Show all upper TPs. • Show next level of upper TPs.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 207/386 . • Show next level of lower TPs. All rights reserved. • Show all lower TPs.14. Expand option This menu item provides the possibility of displaying TPs that are related to the selected TP. 14.14.2 Hide Select the Transmission -> Hide option. 14. Figure 195. Figure 196.14 Navigation Commands 14. which belong to the physical port that is actually connected to the TP.

All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. • Selected TPs. The Board View appears.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 208/386 .14.4 Navigate to Port View Select the Transmission -> Navigate to Port View option. Board View 14.3 Show Supported Board Select the Transmission -> Show Supported Board option. Figure 197.14. • Lower TPs. This menu item provides the possibility of hiding all upper/lower TPs of a selected TP and the deletion of a selected TP. ED 02 SC. The Port View appears. • Upper TPs. This menu provides the possibility of navigating to the corresponding Port View related to the selected TP in order to access a detailed overview of alarms quickly. 14. This menu provides the possibility of navigating directly to the board that supports the TP. Passing on and copying of this document.

use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 198. Port View 3AL 98325 ADAA 209/386 . ED 02 SC. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document.

Passing on and copying of this document. as for the following figure: All rights reserved. Figure 199.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 210/386 .5 Navigate to HOA Port After selected a structured VC or TU. 14. The HOA port displays the internal structure of the payload. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. then click on Transmission –> Navigate to Port View option. Navigate to HOA Port ED 02 SC.14.

3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 211/386 .g. • "Show Cross-Connected TPs" describes the possibility of showing connections between two or more TPs of different hierarchies.1. Not supported in current release. A byte column (9 Byte) as Path Overhead (POH) is added to the Container (C) generated. Several ED 02 SC. • "Protection Switching" deals with switching actions (force. in respect of the STM-1 frame. a standardized transmission has been created. Path Overhead and Container together form the Virtual Container (VC). use and communication of its contents • "Definition of Termination Points" gives an overview about the termination points implemented on the NE not permitted without written authorization. Each of the user channels (2 Mbit/s.1 Introduction 15.a Tributary Unit (TU) is generated. Passing on and copying of this document. The SDH signal structure contains an extended overhead as well as a fixed pointer controlled assignment of the user signal elements. 45 Mbit/s and 140 Mbit/s) is packed into a container synchronous to the STM-1 frame according to a predefined structure.1 Overview The purpose of this domain is to manage the connection of the high and low level path. With the pointer pointing to the start of the VC. manual. thus improving the possibilities of the network management. To adjust the plesiochronous signals to the synchronous network clock. The STM-1 signal structure is achieved by using the multiplex structure complying with ITU-T and ETSI.if several Containers of a group are to be combined . • "Split and Join Cross-Connections" describes how to split or join bidirectional cross-connections. 15.1. Synchronous multiplexers into Virtual Containers (VC) pack signals of the Synchronous and Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH). • "Cross-Connection Types" provides information concerning cross-connection types supported by the NE • "Cross-Connection Protection" provides information concerning cross-connection protection supported by the NE • "Operative sequence to execute Cross-Connections" details the complete procedure to realize cross-connection • "Cross-Connections Management" details the contents of the main cross-connections view • "Create/Modify Cross-Connections" describes the creation and modification of cross-connections • "Activate/Deactivate/Delete Cross-Connections" describes the activation. 15 Cross-Connection Management 15. connection between AU4 and VC4. certain filling algorithms are available. an Administrative Unit (AU) or . Fix fill bits are inserted into synchronous signals. Activation and deactivation not supported in current release.2 Multiplex Structures for SDH By introducing the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH). matching the European with the American standard. lockout protection) on cross- connections • "Print" deals with printing out list entries on printers or into files • "Port Switch Over" not operative. e. 34 Mbit/s. The following chapters provide the user with information concerning operations on cross-connections: • "Multiplex Structures for SDH" gives an overview on the SDH technology All rights reserved. deactivation and deletion of cross-connections.

use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The AU of the signal. finally makes up the STM-1 frame. together with the Section Overhead (SOH).709 The STM-1 frame consists of: • A Section Overhead (SOH) • An AU Pointer area • A payload area ED 02 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 212/386 . All rights reserved. SDH Multiplex Structure according to ITU-T G. TUs form a Tributary Unit Group (TUG) and TUGs again can be combined into a VC. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 200.

320 Mbit/s is generated by combining sixteen STM-1 signals byte interleaved. Frame Construction within the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy The STM-1 frame has a basic bit rate of 155.All rights reserved. These Virtual Containers are of different size and may be nested or packed differently.488. Virtual Containers for the European bit rates: • The STM-1 frame contains a VC-4. • Each TUG-2 contains three VC-12 or one VC-2. A single user channel is packed into a Virtual Container. An STM-1 user signal can be constructed of: • Either 1 x VC-4 • Or 3 x VC-3 • Or 2 x VC-3 + 7 x VC-2 • Or 2 x VC-3 + 21 x VC-12 • Or 1 x VC-3 + 14 x VC-2 • Or 1 x VC-3 + 7 x VC-2 + 21 x VC-12 • Or 21 x VC-2 • Or 14 x VC-2 + 21 x VC-12 • Or 7 x VC-2 + 42 x VC-12 • Or 63 x VC-12. For example an STM-16 signal of 2. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 201. STM-N signals are constructed by integer multiples of the basic signal STM-1 of 155.520 Mbit/s. • Each TUG-3 may contain one VC-3 or seven TUG-2. ED 02 SC. • A VC-4 may contain one C-4 or three TUG-3.520 Mbit/s.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 213/386 .

. e.1. the following abbreviations are used. while own-code signaling is inserted in the transmitted signal. The signal is monitored and passed not permitted without written authorization. ⎯ TU-x (Connection Termination Point).3 Definition of Termination Points (TP) When ports are depicted on the user interface.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 214/386 .e. A distinction is made between the following types of TPs: • CTP (Connection Termination Point) The CTP represents the termination of a connection. As a rule. The High-order Connection Supervision (HCS) function is included. The Low-order Connection Supervision (LCS) function is included. • CTPs on PDH level On PDH level a distinction is made between the following CTPs: ⎯ E4 (Connection Termination Point) The E4-CTP represents the non-intrusive monitoring of incoming 140 Mbit/s PPI ⎯ S4 (Connection Termination Point) The S4-CTP represents the non-intrusive monitoring of outgoing 140 Mbit/s PPI ⎯ E32 (Connection Termination Point) The E32-CTP represents represent the non-intrusive monitoring of incoming 45 Mbit/s PPI ⎯ S32 (Connection Termination Point) The S32-CTP represents the non-intrusive monitoring of outgoing 45 Mbit/s PPI ⎯ E31 (Connection Termination Point) The E31-CTP represents represent the non-intrusive monitoring of incoming 34 Mbit/s PPI ⎯ S31 (Connection Termination Point) The S31-CTP represents the non-intrusive monitoring of outgoing 34 Mbit/s PPI ⎯ E1 (Connection Termination Point) ED 02 SC. TU-12CTP. i. The transmission signal is "terminated".g. All rights reserved. a Termination Point (TP) is the starting and terminating point of a transmission segment. use and communication of its contents The TTP represents the termination of a transmission segment. TU-2CTP. • CTPs on SDH level On SDH level a distinction is made between the following CTPs: ⎯ AU4 (au4 Connection Termination Point) The AU-4CTP represents both the creation and termination of an STM-1 connection. TU-3CTP The TU-x CTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-x connection. 15. the received signal is monitored and the error signaling evaluated. on after modification in one form or another. Passing on and copying of this • TTP (Trail Termination Point) document. Both TP types exist on the SDH level and the PDH level. This section concerns the multiplex structure as well as on the information model of object-oriented programming which was used when forming the user interface.

⎯ VC-4 (Trail Termination Point) A VC-4 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-4 path. • TTPs on SDH level On SDH level a distinction is made between the following TTPs: All rights reserved. ⎯ OS (Optical Section TTP) An OSTTP displays the physical characteristics of a port with optical access (level and code monitoring and conversion). ⎯ S1 (Connection Termination Point) The S1-CTP represents the non-intrusive monitoring of outgoing 2 Mbit/s PPI. ⎯ RST (Regenerator Section TTP) An RSTTP displays the creation and/or termination of an RSOH (Regenerator Section Overhead). a 34 Mbit/s or a 2 Mbit/s port. Depending on the type.. i. ⎯ P (PPI Trail Termination Point) On the PDH side. a 45 Mbit/s. ⎯ MST (Multiplexer Section TTP) An MSTTP displays the creation and/or termination of an MSOH (Multiplexer Section Overhead). Passing on and copying of this ⎯ ES (Electrical Section TTP) document. rows 5 to 9 of the first 9xN columns of an STM-N frame. a 34 Mbit/s or a 2 Mbit/s port. The Mon.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 215/386 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. it can either display the characteristics of a 140 Mbit/s. i. ⎯ E4 (Trail Termination Point) ED 02 SC. an PPITTP corresponds to the ESTTP of the synchronous side. The Mon. a pPITTP corresponds to the esTTP of the synchronous side. it can either display the characteristics of a 140 Mbit/s. (monitoring) label indicates that is possible to enable the CRC4 control signal. a 45MBit/s.e. An ESTTP displays the physical characteristics of a port with electrical access (level and code monitoring and conversion). rows 1 to 3 of the first 9xN columns of an STM-N frame. • TTPs on PDH level On PDH level a distinction is made between the following TTPs: ⎯ PPI (Trail Termination Point) On the PDH side. The E1-CTP represents the non-intrusive monitoring of outgoing 2 Mbit/s PPI. (Monitoring) label indicates that is possible to enable the CRC4 control signal..e. Depending on the type.

use and communication of its contents A VC-4 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-4 path. ⎯ E2 (Trail Termination Point) The E2-TTP represents the creation and/or termination of a 8 Mbit/s connection. ⎯ E3 (Trail Termination Point) The E3-TTP represents the creation and/or termination of a 34 Mbit/s connection. not permitted without written authorization. the working and protection MSN/MSNP outputs (AU4-CTP) enter in the switching selector. ⎯ VC-12 (Trail Termination Point) A VC-12 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-12 path. ⎯ VC-3 (Trail Termination Point) A VC-3 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-3 path. ⎯ VC-4 (Trail Termination Point) All rights reserved. The MSNP-TTP terminates the selected signal and checks the SSF and the MSP protocol failure. Receive side. the MSNP (AU4-CTP) input enters two different MSNP/MSN (unprotected CTP) sources and then the MSN-TTP working and protection sources (to insert the K1-K2 bytes) are sent to the own SPI interfaces. The E4-TTP represents the creation and/or termination of a 140 Mbit/s connection. Passing on and copying of this document. • MSP definition Transmit side. ED 02 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 216/386 .

All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. SC. ED 02 Figure 202.3: NE MANAGEMENT SDH Transport Level Diagram 3AL 98325 ADAA 217/386 .

PDH TPs ITU-T TP names on 1662SMC P PPITTP E4 CTP eCTP S4 CTP p4 E31 CTP eCTP S31 CTP p31 E32 CTP eCTP S32 CTP p32 E1 CTP eCTP S1 CTP p12Mon E4 TTP not supported not supported E3 TTP ED 02 SC. Table 4.1.All rights reserved. The following tables list the TP names mapping conventions in the "Transmission" View.4 Mapping Tables: TP Names The TP names on the 1662SMC reflect the software model the user interface is based on. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 203. PDH Transport Level Diagram 15.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 218/386 . Therefore they differ from the TP names given in the ITU-T recommendations. Passing on and copying of this document.

It enables the transport of all signals in the US hierarchy and ETSI hierarchy levels 1 to 4 (1. OSTTP OpS RSTTP RST MSTTP MST MSP MSP AU-4 CTP Au4/Au4P AU-4-4c CTP Au4P-4c VC-4 TTP Vc4 TUG-3 Tug3 TUG-2 Tug2 TU-3 CTP Tu3 TU-2 CTP Tu2 TU-12 CTP Tu12 15.1. VC-3. ITU-T TP names on 1662SMC not supported E2 TTP VC-4 TTP Vc4 VC-3 TTP Vc3 VC-12 TTP Vc12 Table 5. use and communication of its contents ESTTP ElS not permitted without written authorization.5 Mbit/s to 140 Mbit/s) mapped to Virtual Containers (VCs).5 Cross-Connection Types A cross-connection represents the logical connection between the input and output of the matrix. The incoming signals are mapped or converted to GTI format on the plesiochronous and synchronous I/O boards. ED 02 SC. On the I/O boards. The matrix performs the cross-connection on the VC-4. The NE supports unidirectional. SDH TPs ITU-T TP names on 1662SMC All rights reserved. This frame is based on the STM-1 frame specified by ITU-T Recommendation G. Alcatel's standardized signal format for internal interfaces. bidirectional and broadcast connections unprotected as well as protected. The Generic Transport Interface GTI. based on quality. The matrix only receives and transmits signals in GTI format. The configuration of both matrix copies is always identical.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 219/386 . Passing on and copying of this document. is similar to the STM-1 format. VC-2 or VC-12 level and transfers the VCs to the relevant I/O boards via GTI.707. The VCs are sent from the I/O boards to both copies of the Matrix (A and B) via the GTI. one GTI signal is selected from Copy A or Copy B. called the matrix port.

different `legs' that share the same source TP. B and C on three legs. use and communication of its contents Information is transmitted between input port and output port in both directions (point-to-point).2 Bidirectional Connection document.1 Unidirectional Connection Information is transmitted exclusively from the input port to the output port (point-to-point). there is no routing in reverse direction.1.3 Broadcast Connection (Multi-leg / Multipoint) In contrast to a cross-connection between just two points (point-to-point).1.5. Example of Broadcast Connection with Three Legs A warning box indicates when the resources available for broadcast connections are exhausted. Non-intrusive Monitoring Adding a protection leg to a unidirectional cross-connection offers the ability to perform non-intrusive monitoring on this cross-connection. N.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 220/386 . Passing on and copying of this 15. not permitted without written authorization. a broadcast connection consist of one source and several sinks. Bidirectional Connection 15.5.1. ED 02 SC. Figure 205. one source and one sink. No errors are introduced to the original cross-connection with applying or removing the protection leg. In the example below.B. information is broadcast from one input to outputs A. Figure 206. 15.5. Figure 204. Unidirectional Connection All rights reserved.

6. Input A (input protected) can be protected: Figure 208.1. Bidirectional Connection .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 221/386 . All rights reserved.1. 15. locked out or switched independently. By means of this connection are created links with SNCP protection.1. if a failure occurs at a certain input.3 Protected Broadcast Connection The protected broadcast is realized as a set of independent. the system automatically switches to the protection path from protection Input B to the Output. Bidirectional Connection . Figure 207.B. Therefore. unidirectional connections using the same pair of input termination points.6.2 Protected Bidirectional Connection A bidirectional connection is routed from Input A to the Output C (primary route). it is possible that only some of the protections of the protected broadcast actually switch to the protection input.6 Cross-Connection Protection 15. This second connection is permanently kept in hot standby operation. In the case of a failure.1 Protected Unidirectional Connection A unidirectional connection is routed from Input A to the Output (primary route). Each protection can be forced. 15.Input Protected N. Protected Broadcast ED 02 SC. Figure 209. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 15.B.1.6.Input Protected N. protected. Passing on and copying of this document. By means of this connection are created links with SNCP protection.

whereas leg 1 is not protected. Shows a broadcast connection from input A to outputs A. use and communication of its contents Output C is protected. All the connections are created in a single step of configuration. Passing on and copying of this document. All rights reserved.1.Normal ED 02 SC. • A unidirectional connection from Input protecting B to Output C.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 222/386 . 15. when receive from Input Protecting main the connection is defined inverse. Leg 2 and 3 are protected via input B. B and C. Drop and Continue . not permitted without written authorization. Figure up.4 Drop and Continue Connection A Drop and Continue connection is a composed by: • A unidirectional connection routed from Input A to the Output C and also to Input protecting B.6. when receive from Input main the connection is defined normal. • A unidirectional connection from Output C to Input A. In current release only one out of N legs can be protected. Figure 210.

• DVB-ASI TPs cross connection (TU12/TU3 unidirectional cross connection with VC-12XVVC-3XV.B. a new window called "TP search" is opened. a new window called "Main Cross Connection" is opened. • In the "Main Cross Connection" window repeat the same on the "Output" field and on the "Prot.2 Operative Sequence to execute Cross-Connections This paragraph lists general procedure to realize cross-connection moving among the various menus. ƒ Select the correct value in the fields "Type" and "Protection" ƒ Click on "Choose" relative to the "Input" field. • High order concatenated signal cross connection (AU4–xc between SDH ports) • Low order signal cross connection (TU12 cross connected with VC–12. the "TP search" window is closed. a new window called "Main Cross Connection" is opened. a new window called "TP search" is opened. • Click on "Search" in the "Cross Connection Management" window to see the new cross-connection created. ED 02 SC. Procedure for AU4 concatenated (AU4c) N. use and communication of its contents • ISA board TPs cross connection (ports involved: ISA. ƒ On the "Equipment" field select the Board. ƒ Select the correct value in the fields "Type" and "Protection" • Click on "Choose" relative to the "Input" field. Input" field for protected connections • Click on "OK" in the "Main Cross Connection" window to terminate the creation and subsequently click on "Cancel" to go to the "Cross Connection Management" window. 15. Passing on and copying of this document. ports involved: SDH and PDH ) • 4XANY TPs cross connection (ports involved: 4XANY and SDH) All rights reserved. ƒ On the "Equipment" field select the Board. the "TP search" window is closed. SDH or PDH) not permitted without written authorization. in the "Termination Points" field select the concatenated AU4c (syntax example: r01sr1sl08/port#01-#01AU4P-4c) • Click on "OK". • Select "Transmission" option from the "Views" menu • Select "Transmission" " "Cross Connection" " "Cross Connection Management" • Click on "Create" in the Cross Connection Management window.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 223/386 . Three main cases have been considered: • High order signal cross connection (AU4s between SDH ports). Before to create an AU4 concatenated cross-connection is necessary to define that the AU4s on a STM-4 board are concatenated as explained. in the "Termination Points" field select the AU4 ƒ Click on "OK". ports involved DVB-ASI and SDH) Procedure for high order signal (AU4) • Select "Transmission" option from the "View" menu • Select "Transmission" " "Cross Connection" ""Cross Connection Management" • Click on "Create" in the Cross Connection Management windows.

ƒ On the "Equipment" field select the Board. a new window called "Main Cross Connection" is opened. then selecting the showed TUG3 • Select "Transmission" " "Structure TPs" " then selecting the structure N. Input" field for protected connections • Click on "OK" in the "Main Cross Connection" window to terminate the creation and subsequently click on "Cancel" to go to the "Cross Connection Management" window. after having selected the traffic type. a new window called "TP search" is opened. • Click on "Search" in the "Cross Connection Management" window to see the new cross-connection created.). In the "Termination Points" field select the AU4 and All rights reserved. the "TP search" window is closed.B. a new window called "Tp search" is opened. in the transmission window clicking twice on the TUG3 and TUG2 blocks the TU12 are displayed • Select the TU12 to be used • Select "Transmission" " "Cross Connection" " "Cross Connection Management". The VC4 is automatically choose and indicated as "port # n". Input" field for protected connections • Click on "OK" in the "Main Cross Connection" window to terminate the creation and subsequently click on "Cancel" to go to the "Cross Connection Management" window. ƒ On the "Equipment" field select the Board. FDDI etc. This connection will appear on the Cross Connection Management view in a independent line. Procedure low order signal (example TU12) • Select "Transmission" option from the "View" menu • Select "Transmission" ""Add TP". • Select "Transmission" " "Terminate TP" .g. not permitted without written authorization. a cross is displayed on the AU4 block • Click twice on the AU4 block and on the VC4 block that appears. ƒ Select the correct value in the fields "Type" and "Protection" • Click on "Choose" relative to the "Input" field.1. Passing on and copying of this document. • Repeat the same on the "Output" field and on the "Prot.1) • Click on "OK". a new window called "Cross Connection Management" is opened. • If TU12 (example) are selected. use and communication of its contents click on "OK". • Click on "Search" in the "Cross Connection Management" window to see the new cross-connection created. In the transmission window the AU4 block is displayed. • In the "Main Cross Connection" window repeat the same on the "Output" field and on the "Prot. ED 02 SC. Procedure 4XANY TPs cross connection Note: before to create a cross connection the following step must be executed: • configure the 4xANY board with the Equipment –> Set menu • configure the 4xANY MODULES with the Equipment –> Set menu and choose the traffic type that must be supported by the module (e. • In the "Cross Connection Management" window click on "Create" button. where "n" is the VC4 number.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 224/386 . In the "Termination Points" field select the structured TP (example: TU12 1. FICON. The AU4 is then terminated on a VC4 of the matrix circuit of the COMPACT ADM unit.

– To check the presence of the new cross–connection select the Port –>Cross Connection –> Cross Connection Management option of the menu bar. a new window called ”Search for Cross Connection Output” is opened. all the cross connected TP will be displayed in the “Cross Connection in list” field.1N). – Select the VC–4 TP and then choose the Port –>Cross Connection –> Create Cross Connection All rights reserved. • On the ”Equipment” field select the Board to be used for the connection with the 4XANY board (for example S4. the ”Search for Cross Connection Output” window is closed. repeat the same sequence for all the TPs that has been generated when the traffic type has been defined. the daughter view will be opened. a new window called ”Main Cross Connection” is opened. Procedure for DVB-ASI signal In the following example a VC-12XV will be unidirectionally cross connected with a TU-12.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 225/386 . the port view will be opened with all the relevant TPs. – Click on ”OK” in the ”Main Cross Connection” window to terminate the creation. in the ”Termination Points” field select the AU4 – Click on ”OK”. In the following will be explained how to connect one TpP of the 4XANY. • Select the correct value in the fields ”Type” and ”Protection” • The “Input field” is automatically filled in • Click on ”Choose” relevant to the ”Output” field. Procedure ISA board TPs cross connection Note: before to create a cross connection the following step must be executed: • configure the ISA board with the Equipment –> Set menu • define the TP that must be created on the ISA board by selecting the Configuration –> ISA Port Configuration menu (refer to Chapter 20 for details) – The ISA board TP cross– connection is similar to that described for the 4xANY board. – Click twice on the module to be used. – repeat the same procedure for all the VC–4 generated for the specific traffic type associated to the 4xANY module. For details on 4xANY board refer to the Technical Handbook. the boards P4S1N has been taken like reference board for this example. All the TPs must be used when the cross– connection will be created. automatically a number of TPs (VC–4) are generated for this port and can be viewed in the port view. – In the subrack view click twice on the 4xANY board. the” board view” will be opened . not permitted without written authorization. – Click twice on the daughter board icon. use and communication of its contents option of the menu bar. a new window called ”Coss connection Management” will be opened • Click on the “Search” button. Passing on and copying of this document. Note 1: before to create a cross connection the following step must be executed: ƒ configure the ISA board with the Equipment → Set memu ƒ define the TP that must be created on the DVB-ASI board by selecting the Configuration → ISA Port Configuration memu Note 2: the P4S1N STM-1 port payload must be terminated as TU-12 ED 02 SC.

a new window called “Search for Cross Connection Input” is opened. • On the “Equipment” field select the Equipment Subrack. – Click on “OK” in the “Main Cross Connection” window to terminate the creation. • Select the correct value in the fields “Type” (only UNIDIRECTIONAL) and “Protection” • Click on “Choose” relevant to the “Input” field. the “Search for Cross Connection Input” window will be closed. • Click on the “Search” button. In order to create the cross connection from DVB-ASI to SDH: – In the subrack view select Configuration → Cross Connection Management the “Cross Connection Management” window will be opened. button. All rights reserved. • Click on “Choose” relevant to the “Output” field and repeat the same sequence as above description for the input point but instead of TU12 select now the VC12XV to be connected in the Termination Point Field. all the cross connected TP will be displayed in the “Cross Connection in list” field. – To check the presence of the new cross connection select the Port →Cross Connection →Cross Connection Management option of the menu bar. a new window called “Cross Connection Management” will be opened. ED 02 SC. in the ”TP Search Criteria” field select the VC12XV.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 226/386 . use and communication of its contents • In the Termination Point Field select the VC12XV to be connected and subsequently click on OK not permitted without written authorization. a new window called “Main Cross Connection” is opened. and then click on search. Passing on and copying of this document. click on OK button and the “Search for Cross Connection Output” window will be closed. – Click on the Create button.

use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved. Cross connection management cascade menu ED 02 SC. then clicking on the presented objects with the sequence board>port. Port view is presented with the View " Equipment pull down menu. Passing on and copying of this document.3 Cross-Connections management A list of cross-connections can be displayed in the Cross-Connection Management dialog. Transmission view is presented with the View " Transmission pull down menu. Figure 211. The dialog can be accessed via the Transmission or Port view or via Configuration menu.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 227/386 . 15.

There are two possibilities of displaying a list of cross-connections: • Do not enter any search criteria and press the Search button to display a list of all existing cross- connections. All rights reserved. • State Select the connection state: • Activated • Deactivated (not operative in current release. A list of cross-connections is displayed in the Cross-Connection Management dialog after selecting the Search command.) Number of the cross-connection (automatically assigned) • ACD (not supported. Set Ignore for attributes not to be used as filtering criteria. if at least one ACD is defined on the NE and one or more cross- connections are assigned to this ACD(s).) Enter the Access Control Domain of the relevant cross-connections: E= connection made with 1353SH. Passing on and copying of this document. M= connection made with 1354RM.1 Search Criteria • Name (not supported. This filter option can only be used. the connection state is always Activated) • Prot. Use button Cancel Search to cancel an active search request or close the dialog. The Cross-Connection Management dialog is initially empty. State Select the protection state: • Forced to Input ED 02 SC. • Enter Search Criteria (one or more) and then press the Search button to display a selection of cross-connections.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 228/386 .3. empty= connection made with CT. 15. • Type Select the connection type: • Unidirectional • Bidirectional • Multipoint • Drop Continue • Protection Select protection functionality: • Protected • Not protected • TP Class Select one of the TP types involved in the requested cross-connection. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.

Switch to Input • Auto. use and communication of its contents Enter the TP type and physical location of the port.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 229/386 . board level. Passing on and copying of this TP ID Prefix document. The # within brackets identifies a number. or only the physical location at least down to not permitted without written authorization. according to the following format: R<rack#>s<subr. Switch to Protecting • Lockout • Normal I • Normal P • All rights reserved. Figure 212. • Forced to Protecting • Manual Switch to Input • Manual Switch to Protecting • Auto.#>b<board#>/port#<port#>-TP. Cross-Connection Management Dialog (Initial State) ED 02 SC.

The switch was completed. Passing on and copying of this document. • Protecting Input ED 02 SC. a read only list of cross-connections matching the search criteria appears. <port#>#TP The # within brackets identifies a number.2 Cross-Connection List After a successful search. use and communication of its contents Normal. Direction-related connection type: uni (directional). The reason for the automatic switch was Signal Degrade in the Protecting input. The number of matching cross-connections is displayed in the upper left corner of the list. contains the TP type and physical location of the port according to the format <Rack#>-<subr. • <Location> Indicates the location of the error signal: P (Protecting input) or I (Input) • <Signal state> Indicates the signal state: SD (Signal Degrade) or SF (Signal Failure) • <Switch status> Status of the switch: C (completed) or p (pending) Example: Auto I (P: SD-c) There has been an Automatic switch from the protecting input to the Input where the traffic is currently located. [<Location>: <signal state>-<switch status>]) • <Protection state> All rights reserved. • State Connection state indicating whether cross-connection is A (activated) or D (deactivated) • Dir. DC_N (Drop & Continue Normal) or DC_I (Drop & Continue Inverse) • Input Signal source. State Detailed switching information in the format: <Protection state> <traffic Ind> (<location>: <signal state>-<switch status>. The list contains information concerning the following parameters for each cross-connection: • Prot. Lockout. not permitted without written authorization. Forced or Manual. • <Traffic ind> Indicates the location of current traffic: P (Protecting input) or I (Input).3.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 230/386 . bi(directional) or mp (multipoint). Auto. #>-<Board#>-<port#>. 15.

the TP ID of the destination is specified according to the format r<rack#>s<subr. At the bottom of the dialog is a range of buttons to start actions on the listed cross-connections. Passing on and copying of this document. Or. To mark several cross-connections (multi-select) that are listed in succession. not permitted without written authorization.#>b<board#>/port#<port#>-TP. All actions that may affect traffic must be confirmed. mark a number of individual cross-connections by clicking the mouse button while pressing the <Control> key. The # within brackets identifies a number. Figure 213. To deselect a number of cross-connections at a time. press the <Shift> key and hold it down while moving the mouse pointer to the last entry. Deselect cross-connections by clicking on the respective row while simultaneously pressing the <Control> key. mark at least one cross-connection. the string "multiple Legs" appears instead. use and communication of its contents starting any action apart from creation or printing. Before All rights reserved. A confirmation dialog pops up in this case and the user has to confirm the requested action.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 231/386 . • Output Signal destination for point-to-point cross-connections. select the first cross- connection of a block with a mouse click and the last one with a mouse click while pressing the <Shift> key. Protecting source (for protected cross-connections only). for multi-leg cross-connections. contains the TP type and physical location of the port according to the format r<rack#>s<subr. Cross-Connection Management Dialog (After Search) ED 02 SC.#>b<board#>/port#<port#>-TP .

3. Available if exactly one protected cross-connection is selected from the list. • Protection Switching. • Modify a Cross-Connection. The dialog can be accessed via the Transmission or Port view as for the following menus example or by using the Create or Modify buttons in the Cross-Connection Management dialog. All rights reserved. Prints the filtered list of cross-connections. • Split a Cross-Connection. Available if just one cross-connection is selected from the list. Passing on and copying of this document. 15. Not operative. • Join Cross-Connections. • Delete a Cross-Connection. The dialog has to be closed explicitly. not permitted without written authorization. Available if two cross connections are selected. use and communication of its contents Available if at least one cross-connection is selected from the list. Available if at least one cross-connection is selected from the list.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 232/386 . 15. Not operative. • Print. The Protection Actions dialog is opened. Available if at least one cross-connection is selected from the list. Not operative. The dialog box of Figure below is presented ( “Main Cross Connection” view).4 Create/Modify Cross-Connections Creation and modification of cross-connections are performed in the Main Cross-Connection dialog. The Main Cross-Connection dialog is opened. Available if at least one bidirectional cross connection is selected from the list. • Activate a Cross-Connection.3 Actions available The following actions are available: • Create a cross-connection. The Main Cross-Connection dialog is opened. ED 02 SC. • Deactivate a Cross-Connection.

• If the window is used to create a new cross-connection. ED 02 SC. Only those parameters. the OK button is insensitive when this cross- connection is assigned to NML or it is not assigned to the user profile. the system is designed according to the following guidelines: • All operations that may affect traffic must be confirmed. All others are disabled (faded gray). which are permitted within the current context. which depend on the connection and protection type. the corresponding message box appears. The subsystem provides a confirmation dialog box before the operation can be executed. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. the system verifies that the relevant TPs can be used (not assigned to NML and assigned to the user profile) after the OK button is pressed. 15. Figure 214. Create Cross-Connections To prevent operation faults. A cross-connection is defined through a set of parameters. Passing on and copying of this document.1 Cross-Connection Parameters The "Main Cross Connection" permits to create the cross connections. can be accessed. • If the window displays an existing cross-connection.All rights reserved. If a specified TP is not permitted.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 233/386 .4.

No protection criteria for automatic protection switching can be configured. where the user can display and configure the SNCP Type Protection. Select the direction for Drop Continue: • Normal • Inverse • Protection Define protection state: • Protected • Not Protected • Prot. one or more of those parameters must be defined according to the cross- connection type. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 234/386 . Configurable Parameters • Type Select the connection type: • Unidirectional • Bidirectional • Drop Continue All rights reserved. Criteria button. Activate the relevant entry boxes first of all by clicking on them with the mouse. for the Protection Criteria dialog is opened. Gives an overview about the optional and mandatory input parameters for the various cross-connection types. use and communication of its contents • D&C Topology not permitted without written authorization. To create a cross-connection. Table 1. Protection Criteria ED 02 SC. Criteria (only available for protected connections) Clicking on the Prot. The following SNCP Type is available: • SNCP-I (Inherently monitored Sub-Network Connection Protection) • SNCP-N (Non-intrusively monitored Sub-Network Connection Protection) • SNCP-S (Sub-layer Sub-Network Connection Protection) (Not operative in current release) Figure 215.

When Revertive mode is active. • Prot. click the relevant Choose button and select the TP in the TP Search dialog. click the relevant Choose button and select the TP in the TP Search dialog. The protected element must be error- free during this defined period of time before a protected service is switched back to it. select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. proceed as described previously and press button Add afterwards. No errors are introduced to the original cross-connection with applying or removing the protection leg. and the initialization of the protection switching algorithm. select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. To enter more than one output TP and create a broadcast connection. Passing on and copying of this document. Input To enter the protecting TP. • Input To enter the input TP.B. To delete a leg from the list. Otherwise. A list of all the selected output TPs is displayed in the list box located below it. click the relevant Choose button and select the TP in the TP Search dialog. • Output It is possible to enter one or more output TPs. select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. To enter the Hold Off Time expressed in msec. Non-intrusive Monitoring Adding a protection leg to a unidirectional cross-connection offers the ability to perform non-intrusive monitoring on this cross-connection. In Non-revertive mode. • Revertive (available only for protected connections) Select whether protection is to be revertive or not. All rights reserved. Repeat this procedure for each destination TP. Optional and Mandatory Configurable Parameters for Cross-Connection Creation Input Parameters Unidirectional/Bidirectional Cross Broadcast Cross Connection Connection Not Protected Protected Not Protected Protected Type Unidirectional/Bidirectional Unidirectional D&C Topology Normal/inverse _ _ Protection Not Protected Protected Not Protected Protected Protection _ SNCP-1 _ SNCP-1 ED 02 SC. The Wait To Restore time period is fixed to 5 minutes. Click the Choose button and select the next TP in the TP Search dialog. the Wait To Restore protection period prevents several protection switches being initiated as a result of an intermittent failure. Otherwise. HOT is the time between declaration of Signal Degrade or Signal Fail. Table 6. protected element when the fault has been eliminated. To enter one output TP. In Revertive mode. select the TP in the list box and click on the Delete Leg button. N. use and communication of its contents • HOT (available only for protected connections) Not operative in current release not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 235/386 . a protected service is switched back to its initial. The previously chosen TP is then moved to the list box located below. select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. Otherwise. Otherwise. switchover to the protecting element is maintained even after the fault has been eliminated.

use and communication of its contents _ not available not permitted without written authorization. protected Bidirectional. not protected Bidirectional. In addition. not protected ED 02 SC. protected Broadcast.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 236/386 . Criteria SNCP-N SNCP-N HOT (NOT _ X _ X operative) Protected _ _ _ _ Revertive _ X _ _ Input One TP One TP One TP One TP Protecting Input _ One TP _ One TP Output One TP One TP One or more TPs One or more TPs All rights reserved. not protected Unidirectional. x configuration optional Non-configurable Parameters • CC Topology The topology of the cross-connection is indicated via two icons. Passing on and copying of this document. The left-hand icon displays the current topology and the right one displays a view of the topology following confirmation of the current modifications. the color of an icon indicates the connection state of the cross-connection: Green -> active Brown -> inactive The icon is set according to the entries made in Type and Protection: TPs not cross connected Unidirectional.

ED 02 SC. After creation of a cross-connection.or bidirectional) 1) Select the cross-connection type. The Search for Cross Connection Input dialog offers the possibility to list TPs according to different filter criteria. Creation of a Unidirectional. or select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. E.Output TTI The Trail Trace Identifier of the transmitted (near end) signal is displayed.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 237/386 .4. 3) Select or type in the input TP.Input TTI The received Trail Trace Identifier of the far end signal is displayed. Passing on and copying of this document. first select the rack in the left list box. Figure 216. 15. -. Create a Point-to-Point Cross-Connection (unit. Use button Search in this dialog to update the list. Not operative in the current Release. For information on cross-connection types. 2) Select the protection state. Cross-Connection Icons Example: Figure 217. same input and output TP not permitted without written authorization.g. to obtain a list of all not connected AU-4 TPs of a rack. click the Choose button and select the TP in the Search for Cross Connection Input dialog. Not operative in the current Release.2 Create a Cross-Connection This chapter lists the steps the user has to take to create a cross-connection using The "Main Cross Connection" For a detailed description of the single parameters. the cross-connection list in the Cross Connection Management dialog is not automatically updated.B. N. To enter the TP. Broadcast with one protected leg Drop & Continue normal Drop & Continue inverse All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents Loopback connection: unidirectional. Non-Protected Cross-Connection -.

Criteria) 8) The Hot (Hold Off Time) is not operative in current release All rights reserved. click the Choose button and select the TP in the Search for Cross Connection Input dialog or select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. Select the input TPs in the list and confirm with Ok. ED 02 SC. then select the filter criteria Connection State "not connected" and Class "AU-4" and click on button Search. Passing on and copying of this document. 4) Select or type in the output TP as described in Step 3). For a more detailed description on the Search for Cross Connection. Figure 218. To enter the TP. The following steps only apply to protected cross-connections: 5) Select or type in the protection TP as described in Step 3). Create a Bidirectional Protected Cross-Connection Create a Broadcast Connection 1) Select the cross-connection type "unidirectional" 2) Select the protection state.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 238/386 . 3) Select or type in the input TP. not permitted without written authorization. 6) Configure the Revertive mode 7) Configure the Protection Criteria (Prot. use and communication of its contents Press the button Ok to confirm the creation. The matching TPs are listed in the right list box.

Passing on and copying of this document. Repeat this procedure for each protected output TP (only one protected leg is supported in current release). select the protected TP in the list box and click on the Unprotect Leg button. For a more detailed description on the Search for Cross Connection. 4) Select or type in the output TPs as described in Step 3 ) Press the button Add Leg in the Main Cross Connection dialog and all output TPs are displayed in the list box under the output field. The following steps only apply to protected broadcast connections: All rights reserved. This dialog offers the possibility to list TPs according to different filter criteria. not permitted without written authorization. Afterwards. select the TP in the list box and click on the Delete Leg button. to obtain a list of all TU12 TPs of a board. Search for Cross-Connection Output ED 02 SC. 6) Configure the criteria for automatic protection switching. The matching TPs are listed in the right list box. use and communication of its contents 5) Select or type in the protection input TP. Select the input TPs in the list and confirm with Ok. select the protected output TP in the output list box and click button Protect Leg. then select the filter criteria Connection State "Ignore" and Class "TU12" and click on button Search TPs.Criteria) 8) The HOT (Hold Off Time) is not operative in current release Press the button OK to confirm creation. E. Proceed as described in Step 3 ). Figure 219. To unprotect a leg from the list.g. The leg is then marked as "protected" in the list box. 7) Configure the Protection Criteria (Prot. first select the board in the left list box.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 239/386 . Note that each single protected leg of the broadcast has to be assigned to the same protecting input. To delete a leg from the list.

All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 240/386 . Create a Protected Broadcast Cross-Connection ED 02 SC. Figure 220. Passing on and copying of this document. Create an Unprotected Broadcast Cross-Connection Figure 221.

i.1. Within the Main Cross Connection dialog.e. Modifiable Parameters Input Parameters Modification Not Protected to Protected Protected to not Protected Type _ _ D&C Topology Normal/inverse Normal/inverse Protection Protected Not Protected Protection Criteria X _ HOT (NOT operative) X _ Unprotected _ X Protected X _ Revertive X _ Input X X Protecting Input X _ Output X X _ Not available X configuration optional The following few facts should be taken into consideration when modifying connections. Unprotect a protected cross-connection: When a protected cross-connection is being unprotected (protection changed to "not protected").3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 241/386 . the dialog displays the additional option button Unprotected. It offers the choice of whether to keep the protected input TP (Input) or the protecting input TP (Prot. note that some of the transformations involved may affect traffic (because the system may have to destroy and re-create the cross-connection to perform the necessary transformation). To modify a cross connection selects one from the connection list and then click on the Modify button. Input) as the only signal source of the new unprotected cross-connection. In addition. asking the user to confirm the unprotect action.3 Modify a Cross-Connection When modifying a cross-connection. 15. After modification of a cross-connection. 1.4.B. Refer to Table 2. ED 02 SC. modification of a cross-connection is restricted to the protection state and the parameters required by the protection. Ensure that the active TP is selected (i. Use button Search in this dialog to update the list. use and communication of its contents N. All rights reserved. As mentioned at the beginning of this chapter. a confirmation window warns the user. check the protection state in the Cross-Connection Management dialog).e. An example is in the following Figure. For an overview of the accessible parameter when the protection state has been changed from "not protected" to "protected" and vice versa. a question box appears. please refer to the previous Para. the user is required to confirm operations affecting traffic. For a description of the parameters. not permitted without written authorization.1. the cross-connection list in the Cross Connection Management dialog is not automatically updated. Passing on and copying of this document. Table 7.

Figure 222. Unprotect a Unidirectional Cross-Connection • Protect an unprotected cross-connection: When an unprotected cross-connection is being protected. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. Input button is available to select the protection input connection to insert.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 242/386 . the Prot. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 223. Protect one Leg of a Broadcast Connection ED 02 SC. An example is in the following Figure.

ED 02 SC. To activate a cross-connection. NOTE: the “Delete cross–connection” action is not possible in the case that is still existing any operation/connection/termination on the underlying supported signals.2 Deactivate a Cross-Connection Not supported in current release.1 Activate a Cross-Connection Not supported in current release.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 243/386 . such as: • Performance Monitoring on lower or higher TPs • POM / HPOM operations • Lower order Connections • Higher order Connections • Lower/Higher order Path Terminations • Loop–backs • LAN/LAPD (and any comm/routing channel) • Auxiliary channels Thus the deletion of every active operation/connection/termination is necessary. 15. The connection state (Act = A or D) is indicated in this connection list. which were selected. A confirmation box appears in which to confirm the state change request. To prevent operation errors. A confirmation box appears in which to confirm the state change request.5. select the corresponding connection from the list and click on the Delete button. All rights reserved. 15. select one from the connection list (see) and then click on the Activate button to initiate the process. If the set of cross-connections selected from the list includes both activated and deactivated cross- connections. After creation. select one from the connection list and then click on the Deactivate button to initiate the process. in the same order as above listed. the user must confirm the deletion request. However. deletion of active cross-connections is possible. The deleted cross-connection automatically disappears from the connection list when the operation is successful. Passing on and copying of this document. The Cross Connection Management dialog provides the possibility of displaying a selection of existing cross-connections. The connection in the list is automatically updated to indicate the new connection state (Act = D). To deactivate a cross-connection.5.5 Activate/Deactivate/Delete Cross-Connections 15. which not permitted without written authorization. were selected. a cross-connection is automatically in an active state. 15. clicking the Activate button only initiates actions on the deactivated cross-connections. The connection in the list is automatically updated to indicate the new connection state (Act = A). before the deletion of a cross–connection.5. use and communication of its contents If the set of cross-connections selected from the list includes both activated and deactivated cross- connections.3 Delete a Cross-Connection Only deactivated cross-connections should be deleted. To delete a cross-connection. clicking the Deactivate button only initiates actions on the activated cross-connections.

Split/Join to Protected Bidirectional Cross-Connection ED 02 SC. use and communication of its contents The original cross connection(s) disappear from the list in the Cross Connection Management dialog after not permitted without written authorization. Depending on the protection state of the original cross-connection. The input of the broadcast is the output of the original protected cross-connection. a successful action.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 244/386 . 15. 15. Split/Join Unprotected Bidirectional Cross-Connection b) Protected Cross-Connection Splitting a protected connection results in one protected unidirectional cross-connection and one broadcast with two legs. The other leg in the broadcast is the protecting input. The cross-connections are split without further confirmation from the user. Figure 224. The new cross connection has the same name and activation status as the old bidirectional one. the split action has the following effect: a) Unprotected Cross-Connection An unprotected bidirectional cross-connection is split into two unidirectional cross-connections with the input TP in one of them being the output in the other and vice versa (see Figure below. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document.). The input of the original cross-connection is one of the legs in the broadcast. Split Select one or more bidirectional cross connections from the list in the Cross Connection Management dialog and press Split.6.6 Split and Join Cross-Connections Not supported in current release.1 Split a Cross-Connection Precondition Only bidirectional cross-connections can be split. The user has to press Search to see the new cross connections. Figure 225.

or 2) One of them is protected and unidirectional.6.e. effect b). The result is either a bidirectional or a protected bidirectional cross-connection. The original cross connection(s) disappear from the list in the Cross Connection Management dialog after a successful action. All rights reserved. i. The cross-connections are joined without further confirmation from the user. not permitted without written authorization. ED 02 SC. they are listed in black color in the Cross Connection Management dialog. 15. Passing on and copying of this document. and the other one a broadcast with two legs. • Both cross-connections have the operational state "enabled". unidirectional and the input is the output of the other one. If the original cross-connections have different names. also refer to Chapter Split a Cross-Connection. Press Search to see the new cross-connections in the list. use and communication of its contents • Both cross-connections have the same connection state (activated or deactivated). Join Select exactly two cross connections in the Cross Connection Management dialog and press the Join button.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 245/386 . the new name is a concatenation of the names of both of them. Restriction: the input of the broadcast connection has to be the output of the protected connection and the legs of the broadcast match the input and the protection input of the unidirectional connection.2 Join Two Cross-Connections Precondition Two cross-connections can be joined if they match the following characteristics: • The connections are either 1) Both unprotected.

• Release Force Forced switching is disabled and automatic protection switching re-enabled. ED 02 SC. • Force to Protecting (Input) The cross-connection is switched to the protecting input regardless of signal quality. • Manual Switch to Protecting Input (not operative in current release) The user can switch over to the protecting input manually. Figure 226. Passing on and copying of this document. e. 15. Protection Actions Dialog The dialog window enables the user to perform protection. Force All rights reserved. Note that a protection state can only be changed within the same or from a higher priority level. Switching over is not executed if the signal quality on the protecting path is worse than on the protected path. not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 246/386 .related operations on protected cross- connections. These are: • Force to Input (not operative in current release) The cross-connection is switched to the protected input regardless of signal quality. whereby Lock has the highest priority and Manual Switch the lowest. Lock Out and Manual Switch belong to different levels. • Manual Switch to Input (not operative in current release) The user can switch over to the protected input manually. Users can only switch protection on cross-connections belonging to them and not assigned to the NML. The three protection actions Force.g. Automatic protection is disabled. A second condition is that protection is enabled for the cross-connection concerned (protection parameter is set to "protected").7 Protection Switching The Protection Actions dialog is displayed after clicking on the Protection button in the Cross Connection Management dialog. Automatic protection is disabled. use and communication of its contents To Protecting can be reverted with Release but not with Manual Switch To Input. • Release Manual Switch (not operative in current release) A manual switch is disabled and automatic protection switching re-enabled. Switching over is not executed if the signal quality on the protected path is worse than on the protecting path.

Figure 227. This option is used to print the currently filtered cross-connection list and the related filter settings on the default printer or to a file in postscript or ASCII format.B. Figure 228. After clicking on an action button and completing the action initiated. All the operations listed are context-dependent and are enabled or disabled ("grey") accordingly. Passing on and copying of this document. • Lock Out to Invoke The connection path is locked for protection switching. there is no error message displayed to indicate this.e. N. i.B. neither forced nor manual switching can be performed. After completion of protection switching. Select Printer N. • Release Lock The protection lock is disabled. All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents 15.8 Print not permitted without written authorization. the list entry in the Cross Connection Management dialog is updated automatically. Select Output Format ED 02 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 247/386 . the dialog disappears automatically. If no printer is installed.

Show Cross Connected TPs view The result is that all other TPs connected to the currently selected TP are displayed.g. ED 02 SC. All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 248/386 . show all TPs that are above the TU12CTP) enables all the related TPs to be added to the view so that the complete signal flow can be illustrated. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 229.9 Show Cross-Connected TPs An overview of signal flow can be requested by means of a user action. A line indicates the connection. The user can select a TP and initiate the action Show Cross Connected TPs from the Transmission view. Expanding and hiding TPs that are associated with the currently selected TP (e. This functionality should only be applied selectively (either for a single TP or selected group of TPs). 15. Passing on and copying of this document.

SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 02 Figure 230.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA Show Cross Connected VC4 of an AU4 249/386 . Passing on and copying of this document. All rights reserved.

Select the auxiliary port/vocal channel TP involved in the operation After having deleted an OH byte termination. depending on the context.Select the output OH TP involved in the operation After having deleted an OH cross-connection. The possible operations are: • Overhead cross-connection . so TP could be used instead of OH bytes or auxiliary port. 16.Select type of cross-connection .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 250/386 .Cross-connection between 2 or more OH bytes All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents . • OH Termination The operator has to be able to terminate one OH byte onto an auxiliary port or vocal channel. 16 OVERHEAD MANEGEMENT 16. • Total MSOH Pass-through ED 02 SC.Definition of the Phone Parameters There is a TP associated to every OH byte and to every auxiliary port. The possible cross-connection types are: • Unprotected bidirectional point to point The steps an operator has to do in order to perform the cross-connection are the following: • Create the OH TPs involved in the operation • Create the OH cross-connection: . Passing on and copying of this document.2 OH Connection overview Here are described the possible OH connections • OH Cross-connection The operator has to be able to cross-connect 2 or more OH bytes on 2 different boards. .Total Pass-through of the MSOH bytes for some cards . the involved TPs have to be deleted.Select the created OH TP . The steps an operator has to do in order to perform the OH bytes termination are the following: • Create the OH TP involved in the operation • Create the OH byte termination: .Termination of an OH byte onto an auxiliary port or vocal channel not permitted without written authorization.Select the input OH TP involved in the operation . the involved TP have to be deleted.1 Introduction The purpose of this set of dialogs is to handle the operations on the Overhead (OH) bytes of the NE.

• OH Cross Connection. • OH TP creation. use and communication of its contents After having deleted a total MSOH pass-through. the involved msPassThroughCTP points have to be deleted. 16. Passing on and copying of this document. Overhead options The options are described in next paragraphs. A total msoh pass-through connection (connection between msPassThroughCTP points) is set-up only if no single msoh pass-through connection are set and if no single msoh cross-connection are set. ED 02 SC. To access select Overhead option from the Configuration pull down menu. the following options are presented in the cascading menu.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 251/386 .Select the output msPassThroughCTP point involved in the operation All rights reserved. • OH Phone Parameters. a single msoh pass-through connection or a single msoh cross-connection cannot be set.3 Overhead views The Overhead Views allows performing the previously presented operations. For STM ports it make sense to allow the operator to perform a total pass-through of the MSOH bytes. • OH TP deleting.Select the input msPassThroughCTP point involved in the operation . The steps an operator has to do in order to perform the total MSOH pass-through are the following: • Create the msPassThroughCTP points involved in the operation • Create the total MSOH pass-through: . If a total msoh pass-through connection is set. not permitted without written authorization. Figure 231.

Passing on and copying of this document. All rights reserved. ED 02 SC. Cross Connection Management for Overhead dialog It is similar to the dialog used for the cross-connection of the TP for paths.4 OH Cross Connection Select the Configuration pull down menu. also in this case already described for path management. Figure 232.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 252/386 . The Cross-Connection Management for Overhead dialog opens and allows to start the configuration. then the same description and functions are valid. 16. Next configuration steps use the Main Cross-Connection for Overhead dialog and the TP Search dialog. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Select the Overhead option and then from the cascading menu the OH Cross Connection option.

• Deleted AFTER a cross-connection/termination deleting involving them has been confirmed. can start the search and select one or more cross connections/terminations among those presented in a read-only list as a result of the search operation. The operator can set the filtering criteria. In the following a description of the main functions and commands is given. output TPs involved . After choosing one or more cross connections/terminations. TPs . Main Cross-Connection for Overhead dialog There is one big difference between the OH TPs and the other kinds of TPs: the OH TPs have to be: • Created ONLY BEFORE a cross-connection/termination operation involving them has been performed.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 253/386 . the following information is shown: direction (bidirectional) and the input. Figure 233. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. For each cross connection/termination matching the filtering criteria. The current implementation of the TP Search Dialog (TPSD) works only with created TPs. Cross-Connection Management for Overhead dialog • Supported operations ƒ Search cross connections/terminations according to one or more of the following filtering attributes: type. Passing on and copying of this document. this dialog allows to: • Delete the selected xconnection/termination • Go to the "Main Cross Connection for Overhead" dialog and modify the existing cross connection/termination ED 02 SC. also to list the Supported and Not Supported operation.

the operator can perform the operations hereafter listed: • Selection of the cross-connection type • Selection of the input TP involved in the cross-connection • Selection of the output TP involved in the cross-connection In order to do that the operator can either type in the involved TPs ID or use the TP Search dialog. some fields of this dialog are disabled. Delete operations can be performed on several cross connections/termination at the same time. yes to all/cancel for multiple items • Not Supported operation When used for OH purposes. depending on the NE type characteristics: ƒ Choose one input TP ƒ Choose one output TP It is possible to directly type in the TP name or to click on the Choose button to select a TP from the TP Search dialog box ED 02 SC. Modify operations can be performed only on single cross connections/terminations. The operation buttons availability follows some rules: • The Delete and Print buttons are enabled only if at least one item is selected from the list. • Supported operations ƒ When creating a new cross connection. Note: this dialog disappears only when the user explicitly clicks on the close button. and being the OH cross connection operations a subset of those applying to the general cross connections (e. The choices for this dialog are: yes/no for single items. All rights reserved. not permitted without written authorization. When some operation may affect the existing traffic. A special dialog will ask the user for a confirmation.1. some or all of the following operations are available.g: protections are not allowed).4. According to the philosophy of offering only meaningful operations to the user. By clicking on the proper portions of the dialog and on the proper buttons. It brings up the Main cross connection dialog. the operator is warned about that.1 Main Cross-Connection for Overhead dialog See Figure up. the Cross-Connection Management dialog doesn't support the following functionalities: • Protect cross connections/terminations: all the OH cross connections/terminations are unprotected • Activate/Deactivate cross connections/terminations: all the OH cross connections/terminations are automatically active since their creation • Split cross connection/termination • Modify Cross Connection Termination 16. Passing on and copying of this document. It brings up the Main cross connection Dialog. and a confirmation dialog must be answered to carry on/cancel the operation. • The modify button is enabled if one (and only one) item is selected.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 254/386 . use and communication of its contents • The create button is always enabled. The OH xconnections are automatically active at the moment of their creation.

The auxiliary and vocal channels TPs are in the SERVICE board of slot 20 The auxiliary channels are: • 1 x G. in the screen are indicated as: . this dialog is a subcase of the most generic TP Search. use and communication of its contents • All the possible OH TPs belonging to a specified board/port: board/port selected and no TP class selected not permitted without written authorization. in the screen are indicated as: .R01sr1sl20/port#03--#01-eOCTP Expanding this TP.2 TP Search dialog The TP Search dialog currently offers: • Navigation rack/subrack/board/port • A list of TPs to choose from When used in the OH domain.R01sr1sl20/port#01-#01-q23TTP Expanding this TP.703 64Kbit/s.R01sr1sl20/port#04-#01-aux . RS or VC class selected • All the OH TPs already connected (also accordingly to the connection type) • All the OH TPs not yet connected • A combination of the above options In this Network Element to connect the auxiliary / vocal channels and the Overhead bytes the following operative indication must be observed: .4. The operator can choose among a list of: • All the possible OH TPs belonging to a specified class: no board selected and MS.703 2Mbit/s (not operative in current release).R01sr1sl20/port#01-#03-q23TTP ED 02 SC. four referred TPs are presented .R01sr1sl20/port#01-#02-q23TTP .R01sr1sl20/port#01-#01-q23TTP .1.R01sr1sl20/port#01-#01-v24CTP . in the screen are indicated as: . 31 referred TPs are presented • 2 x G.R01sr1sl20/port#01-#01-v11CTP . RS or VC class selected All rights reserved.R01sr1sl20/port#02-#01-v24CTP • 1 x phonic interface (voice channel).R01sr1sl20/port#05-#01-aux • 2 x V11. Passing on and copying of this document.R01sr1sl20/port#02-#01-v11CTP • 2 x V24. in the screen are indicated as: .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 255/386 . in the screen are indicated as: . • All the possible OH TPs belonging to a specified board/port and class: board/port selected and MS. 16.

RS or VC4 Tp.a Choose button is used to display a list of OH Tps to be created. After having performed the create request. The other boards used to terminate or cross-connect the OH bytes are the STM-n boards. In detail. the OH TP field is set to empty.R01sr1sl20/port#01-#04-q23TTP . To visualize the OH TP in the TP Search view double clicks on the MS.5 OH TP creation All rights reserved. OH TP creation ED 02 SC. The OH TP is present in MS.#0011 to 0099 (MS or RS) are referred to the coordinates of the Section Overhead bytes on the SDH frame (1. the dialog-box contains the following graphical object: . The examples of the figure in this OH connection chapter can be helpful to the operator 16.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 256/386 . Select the Overhead option and then from the cascading menu not permitted without written authorization. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog. Apply button is used to perform a create request of the TP displayed in the OH TP field. the OH TP creation option. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. The OH TP creation dialog opens and allows to create the OH TP to cross connect. the "FU" is for Future Use. In these TPs the indication ". Passing on and copying of this document. RS and VC4 TP Class. The Choose button starts the TP Search with predefined filtering. the TP Search dialog allows the operator to visualize only not created OH Tps. .9) The voice channel are identified by the "ow" indication. . use and communication of its contents Select the Configuration pull down menu. "UC" is for User Channel and "Pass" is for Pass through channel.. the "NU" is for National Use.OH TP field displays the label of the selected OH Tp to be created. Figure 234.1 to 9..

Passing on and copying of this document. SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT OH Search TP for creation 3AL 98325 ADAA 257/386 . ED 02 Figure 235.

a Choose button is used to display a list of OH Tps to be deleted. the dialog-box contains the following graphical object: . Figure 236. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog. OH TP deleting ED 02 SC. 16. In detail.6 OH TP deleting Select the Configuration pull down menu. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. Apply button is used to perform a delete request of the TP displayed in the OH Tp field.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 258/386 . All rights reserved. Select the Overhead option and then from the cascading menu the OH TP deleting option. the TP Search dialog allows the operator to visualize only created and not cross-connected OH Tps. Passing on and copying of this document. The OH TP deleting dialog opens and allows deleting the OH TP no more involved in an OH cross- connection.OH Tp field displays the label of the selected OH Tp to be deleted. use and communication of its contents . not permitted without written authorization. The Choose button starts the TP Search with predefined filtering. After having performed the delete request. the OH Tp field is set to empty.

3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 259/386 . Not operative in current release Apply button performs the configuration change of the modified phone parameters of the selected phonic interface without close the dialog Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. where enable or disable the extension of the selected phonic interface. ED 02 SC. • The phone number field. Select the Configuration pull down menu. Phone Parameters dialog window In the window are presented: • The interface field (at the top) where can be selected the phonic interfaces to be configured. All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.7 OH Phone Parameters The OH phone parameters option permits to configure the telephone number and to manage the parameter "phonic extension". Figure 237. Figure below. If enabled the phonic signal is extended towards the external on the access panel of the NE. to set the telephone number for operator calls on the phonic interface. Opens. Select the Overhead option and then from the cascading menu the OH Phone Parameters option. • The phonic extension field. 16. Passing on and copying of this document.

3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 260/386 . By selecting the GMAU TP and subsequently the Transmission >Performance menu. use and communication of its contents For the purpose of quality supervision. issued. Not operative in current release. Near end performance monitoring events are: ED 02 SC.1. A set of performance counters is provided according to the Termination Point (TP). All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. 17. the following options are available: – Configure Performance Monitoring. On the ETHERNET boards a set of performance counters are foreseen. it is not possible to start individual performance counters. – Display Current Data. Examples of these counters are Error Seconds (ES) and Severely Error Seconds (SES). 24h) and stores the values in history data logs. If a counter value has crossed a threshold level.1. for future releases .1 Introduction The Performance Monitoring domain on the NE covers the monitoring of counter values for trail termination points and connection termination points. • Collection of the performance data. 17 Performance Monitoring 17.2 Supported Performance Counters The NE uses performance counters to count transmission errors.for QoS and maintenance purpose. where performance measurement occurs. The user can start performance monitoring on one or more subsets of counters for each TP. • Configuration of the quality thresholds that generate alarms and log records when predefined values are exceeded. the values of the error counters can be compared to user-defined threshold levels. The Performance Monitoring domain counts these errors during specified granularity periods (15 min.1 Overview These functionalities are described in the following chapters in addition to general information concerning performance monitoring on the NE. – Display Maintenance Counter. a notification (threshold crossing alarm) is not permitted without written authorization. The principle performance management functions are: • Configuration of the counting interval for each performance measurement point. • Chapter Configuration deals with the configuration of performance monitoring • Chapter Display Current Data deals with displaying current performance data • Chapter Display History Data deals with displaying history performance data • Chapter PM Threshold Table Selection deals with the selection of threshold tables • Chapter PM Threshold Table Modification/Display deals with the modification of threshold tables and permits or display the same 17. Not operative in current release. Not operative in current release.

An FESES is counted as an FEE. This event is identified by the A1/A2 byte of the SDH Frame. The corresponding Far End (FE) performance monitoring events are: • Far End Background Block Error (FEBBE): A far end error block. For the regenerator section. which were received by the Far End Terminal. only near end counting is supported. ED 02 SC. 17. • Pointer Justification Event (PJE): A PJE is an inversion of I.bits of the pointer. Further definitions: • Error Block (EB): A block in which one or more bits associated with the block are erroneous.3 Far End (FE) and Near End (NE) Performance Counting Far end performance monitoring parameters are derived from Remote Defect Indicators (RDI) and Remote Error Indicators (REI). which do not occur as part of an SES. at a terminal. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of unavailable time. . which is part of the Unavailable Time at the far end. at a terminal. a one second period with one or more error not permitted without written authorization. PDH TPs Only near end counters are supported in receive direction for all PDH path layers. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events. use and communication of its contents • Far End Error Second (FEES): Identifies. Passing on and copying of this document. or at least one Severely Disturbed Period (SDP) which was received/detected by the Far End Terminal. therefore. the count of error blocks that were received by the far end terminal. Please note that this counter is deprecated by ETSI and will be removed from international standards.or D. which does not occur as part of an FESES. • Far End Severely Error Second (FESES): Identifies. The Termination Point (TP) type determines which performance monitoring events can be counted: . • Error Second (ES): A one second period with one or more error blocks or with a defect. which is part of the Unavailable Time. The counting of OFS is sonly supported for the regenerator section termination. a one second period which contains > 30% of error blocks. • Background Block Error (BBE): A BBE counter measures the number of error blocks. • Out of Frame Second (OFS): An AFS is defined as a second in which one or more out of frame events have occurred. • Severely Error Second (SES): A one second period which contains > 30% of error blocks. All rights reserved.1. • Unavailable Time (UAT): A period of unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SES events. or at least one Severely Disturbed Period (SDP).3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 261/386 . • Remote Defect Indicator (RDI) [formerly Far End Receive Failure (FERF)]: indicates to a terminal that the far end terminal has detected an incoming failure. blocks or with a defect. at a terminal. • Far End Unavailable Second (FEUAS): An Unavailable Second is a second. • Near End Unavailable Second (NEUAS): An Unavailable Second is a second. together with an increment or decrement of the pointer value to signify a frequency justification. SDH TPs Both near end and far end counters are supported in receive direction of the signal for all SDH path layers and for the multiplex section layer. • Remote Error Indicator (REI) [formerly Far End Block Error (FEBE)]: Identifies. no far end information is transmitted and. An SES is also counted as an ES.

the near end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from B to A.826. the near end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from A to B. while the far end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from B to A. the end-to-end monitoring can be requested provide monitoring for Quality of Service purposes and.1. Far End Performance Monitoring Principles • At Node A. • At Node B. far end errors cannot be counted in the case of near end failures. ES. 17. ES. SES) for NE-PM and FE-PM respectively.5 End to End (e-e 24h) Performance Counting VCn trails can be monitored in intermediate node through the activation of performance monitoring process on Monitoring function. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. for network Maintenance applications. 17.4 Bidirectional Counting (24 h Bi) for QoS As specified in G.All rights reserved. When the path transports unidirectional payload just the four counters for the NE-PM are activated (BEE. PM data are collected by a single UAS plus two sets of three event counters (BEE. In compliance with ETSI and ITU-T standards. As the trails are often responsible of the end-to-end customer service.784 and ETSI 300417. and vice versa. the bidirectional PM collection for Quality of Service has been supported by combining the information on each direction of transport to assess a single unavailability state: the bidirectional path is in the unavailable state if either one or both directions are in the unavailable state. Passing on and copying of this document. in addition. SES and UAS). ED 02 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 262/386 . Near end performance data at Node A and far end performance data at Node B correspond as long as neither direction is disturbed. Figure 238. Data collection is performed only on 24 hours registers and the NE maintains a buffer of two registers: the 24hours current registers and the historical one. G. while the far end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from A to B.1. If SNCP is configured the Quality of Service collection have to be enable in the monitoring functions after the matrix.

./24H FE_BBE_. TC_API as access point identifier complying with generic 16-byte string format. SES only). TC_RDI indicating to the far end that defects have been detected within the TC at the near end TC sink. it is not possible to start individual performance counters (e. 17. eFE-es. Passing on and copying of this document. No Threshold crossing mechanism is supported on AU-PJE counters.1.7 Tandem Connection Termination (TCT) and Monitoring (TCM) TCM allows monitoring within the operator domain. UAS. eFE-SES. The number of positive and negative outgoing PJE per second are collected in 15 minutes and 24 H counters. use and communication of its contents For AU PJE counters. FE-ES.8 Performance Monitoring on 2 Mbit/s ISDN–PRA The feature provides PM data collection at the 2 Mbit/s ISDN–PRA terminations. ES and SES counting is stopped during Unavailable Time.. Performance monitoring can be enable and disables at any time during a monitoring period.783 not permitted without written authorization. after the AU has been resynchronized to the local clock. . ED 02 SC.1. VC-4.g. In case of unidirectional process one direction can be monitored end to end and both 15minute and 24h collection can be activate 15min. At the input point the reference value is set to zero by using the TCM feature. . eFE-BBE. The TCA are also evaluated in both 15-minute and 24H counters. Refer to G. All rights reserved..1.1. This process can be unidirectional (for Monitoring) or bidirectional process (for QoS). End to end monitoring is achieved by activation of Performance monitoring on the two direction of path and using far-end primitives. BBE.). Incoming error count (IEC) .784.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 263/386 . The 24-hour monitoring periods start at 00: 00 (UTC) and the 15-minute monitoring periods start at xx: oo. TCM provides: . TC_REI to indicate error blocks within the TC to the far end. 17. FE-UAS on incoming or egress signal depending of the POM is enable. The bidirectional process need the presence on the two Monitoring functions in the two directions in one NE and among the two monitoring function a 24 hour collection can be activated with the collection of incFE_BBE. A history of 16 x 15minutes counters and 2 x 24H are stored in the NE for each AU selected. Tandem Connection Monitoring is applicable to VC-4-nc (n=1. incFE-ES. FE-SES.4. xx : 30 and xx : 45. An entity of all near end or far end performance monitoring events is always counted.16. The quality within the operator's on domain can be proven regardless of the received quality of the signal at the entry point of the network. incFE-SES. 17.6 Performance Monitoring on AU-PJE AU PJE (Administrative unit point justification event) is an optional parameters request in G. the positive and negative PJE shall be counted separately on one selectable AU within an STM-N signal. 826 bidirectional for QoS – M2120 unidirectional near–end / far–end for maintenance 17.9 Performance Data Collection Near end and far end performance-monitoring events are counted over fixed monitoring periods of 15 minutes and 24 hours. OEI to indicate error blocks of the engrossing VC-n. The performance monitoring capabilities (applied on p12Mon TP) support both the standard data collection modes: – G. VC-3 and VC-12 layers.

not permitted without written authorization. Time stamping is performed using UTC (as for all alarms). Since PM data is not stored after monitoring is disabled. At the end of the monitoring period. Passing on and copying of this Zero suppression is a basic mechanism to remove irrelevant PM information and to reduce the amount of document.10 Data Collection N. the current register is reset.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 264/386 . A PM report is suppressed and hence no history record is created by the entity. i. PM data is not counted on boards that were plugged out at the moment of enabling data collection (see PM Configuration dialog). it is possible that have still not been received the PM data of the previous monitoring interval. incrementing the performance counters each time an error is detected. 17. zero suppression is active for all PM enabled TPs. the PM data of the previous interval is lost in this case. Nevertheless. 900 for 15 min. When the user disables the monitoring of a TP within the first 10 minutes of a 15-minute period. ED 02 SC. together with a time stamp to identify the period (including the day). Performance Monitoring can be started at any time. . the NE does not provide complete performance measurement for the protected TPs. An interval is error-free (all PM counter values are zero) . PM was running properly (the suspect interval flag is not set) By default. SES) are counted in a counter per event.PM was enable enabled during the entire monitoring interval (the elapsed time equals its nominal value. The interval is marked for suspect data and the elapsed time indicates the length of the measured period. After that. As soon as Performance Monitoring is started on the Craft Terminal. which is responsible for PM reporting when all of the following conditions are true for the monitoring period: .B. PM data is counted on boards that were plugged in at the moment of enabling data collection. and 86400 for 24 h<9. The number of suppressed intervals is indicated.g. If equipment or line protection switching occurs during a counting interval. The performance data counted is evaluated every quarter of an hour or every 24 hours and stored there in a history record. but were plugged out and back in some time during data collection. Event Counting The performance events (e. Suspect Flag A suspect interval flag is set as an indication that the data of the corresponding register may be either incomplete or invalid. These counters are called the current register. use and communication of its contents PM reports in the system.e. Only the period between the last switch and the end of the counting window is counted. current PM data is collected on the I/O boards. the contents of the current registers are transferred to the first of the recent registers. It is also possible to reset an individual current register manually. Zero Suppression All rights reserved.1.

a Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) is transmitted to the alarm manager. The user can modify and delete such tables.For 15-minute (explicit clearance) monitoring periods.For 24-hour (implicit clearance) monitoring periods. the contents of the current registers are moved the first of the recent registers. In compliance with ETSI and ITU-T standards. This TCA is automatically cleared by the system at the end of the following monitoring period in which the event count is less than or equal to the reset threshold value and there was neither an unavailable nor a suspect period during this monitoring period. the recorded errors through the performance counters can be compared to threshold levels. Such information can be used to sectionalize faults and to locate the source of intermittent errors. two threshold values (set. Passing on and copying of this document. Two thresholds mechanism are supported: .. • Increased thresholds (higher than current value of counters) (only for 24 h) ED 02 SC. • Even in case of a suspect interval the TCA is cleared if no unavailability was detected and the low threshold had not been reached. To clear a TCA. use and communication of its contents 17. Additionally an explicit clearance of TCAs for all granularity periods is executed if one of the following events occurs during the current interval: • Deletion of the current data instance. the oldest information is discarded.12 Thresholds not permitted without written authorization. The threshold values are defined in threshold tables together with a severity and a flag indicating whether crossing this value should be notified by an alarm and logged or only stored in the current problem list. a TCA is generated. . The following limitations apply for explicit clearance: • The value of the low threshold is fixed to "0" (only a single threshold is provided by a threshold table). All the history registers are time stamped. which has crossed the threshold. At the end of each monitoring period. There are sixteen 15-minute period registers and one 24-hour period registers per monitored event. History data. All rights reserved. For quality supervision purposes.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 265/386 . in the form of performance monitoring event counts.1. 17. When all recent registers are full. it does not provide a complete set of all counters. Therefore.11 Performance Monitoring History Performance monitoring history data is necessary to assess the recent performance of transmission system. Different thresholds can be assigned for near end and far end and for granularity of 15 minutes and 24 hours. • Resetting of counters. The TCA only reports the value of the counter. The user can retrieve this information from the Current Performance Management Data Dialog. one threshold value is defined: if the event count reaches or exceeds the threshold value during the monitoring period. If a counter value has crossed a threshold level. the user has to explicitly retrieve all current performance data after receiving the alarm. reset) are defined: a TCA is generated during the monitoring period when the event count reaches or exceeds the set threshold value the first time. • An SES threshold crossing is cleared at the end of the interval if no unavailability was detected and SES had not reached the low threshold (low threshold equal to 0). is stored in registers in the NE. These registers are called the recent registers.1. the history registers operate as follows: The history data is contained in a stack of registers. the alarm must be manually acknowledged by the user.

This "PM Configuration" dialog serves as the main interface to all PM services. Each page label presents a range of parameters for one near end or far end granularity period (15 min. click on the top part of the label: ED 02 SC. All rights reserved. The selected TP is indicated in the first box at the top of the screen: TP Identifier. As long as the PM Configuration dialog is open. the PM Configuration dialog also contains an option button showing the configured POM and SUT options as follow. TCM) must be created first. N.B. . Every configuration of all monitoring intervals is defined using this dialog. TCT Bidirectional After Matrix .B. TP (Performance is made on AU-PJE) . or 24 h). a Question dialog box is displayed. Select the TP and open the PM Configuration dialog by clicking on the menu item Configure Monitoring. In case of au4CTP and tuxCTPs and VcxCTP. 17.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98325 ADAA 266/386 . click on Cancel to continue or OK to interrupt any action. PathOverhMon Before Matrix . Configure Monitoring. TCM Before Matrix . to identify the selected TP. Figure 239. PathOverhMon After Matrix . and page labels. N. To select a special page label. not supported) or Tandem Connection (TCT. TCM After Matrix . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. a modified POM/SUT/TC configuration is not automatically recognized and displayed. Passing on and copying of this document. which together form a dataset. Path Overhead Monitoring (POM) or Supervised Unequipped Termination (SUT. Therefore make sure to reopen the PM Configuration dialog each time the POM/SUT configuration is changed. TCT Bidirectional Before Matrix When more than one of the above options is chosen. The PM Configuration dialog is designed as a notebook consisting of a text field. It is possible to access the same "PM Configuration" dialog selecting a TP in the "Port view" and opening the same Performance > Configure Monitoring option in the Port pull down menu. To configure PM for au4CTPs and tuxCTPs. This may lead to rejections or confirmations of forbidden PM configuration.2 Configuration ( SDH Port ) Use menu item Add TP to display a special TP in the Transmission menu.

For AU-4 CTP